Home

EPD .Connect User Guide - John J. Jacobs

1. dvise reg DIVISION MockUp graphics window position system epd menus tools m Replacement EPD Connect tools menu expview m Replacement menu file for Assembly mode in EPD Connect system epd trigger tree openconf Tells DIVISION MockUp to open a tree pre_open Tells DIVISION MockUp to perform activities before opening the tree in EPD Connect refindex Tells DIVISION MockUp to manage reference indexes for tree synchronization closeconf Close configuration in dVISE closevis Tells DIVISION MockUp to quit addcomp Updates DIVISION MockUp tree when nodes are added in EPD cutcomp Updates DIVISION MockUp tree nodes are deleted in EPD Connect editprop Sends updates of part position orientation or name to DIVISION MockUp ca_cfg r Modified open panel resource dvnew cf Additional action invoked by creating a new configuration activated by the ca_new r resource file dvopen cf Additional action invoked by opening an existing configuration activated by ca_cgf r resource file merge pl Converts navigator report from EPD Connect to temporary VDI format dvopen pl Activates loading of tree into DIVISION MockUp This is invoked from dvnew cf and dvopen cf files startdvise pl Runs DIVISION MockUp and initiates communications between DIVISION MockUp and EPD Connect Also invokes upddvise p1 to export tree to DIVISION MockUp upddvise pl Invokes transfer of tree to dVISE by
2. Report Window Description Session Summary Reports general and structure information related about the tree Component Status Reports component status information Compare Status Displays node comparison information Vault Transfer Requests Transfers data to from the Vault Indicator Key Lists the color codes for access indicators ADRAW Window Displays ADRAW information Clipboard Displays contents of clipboard Toolbar Customizer Chooses a desktop button set session Summary Choose File gt Session Summary The Session Properties dialog box opens EPD Connect User Guide 2 33 Using the Product Structure Window Status and Report Windows General Tab The General tab shows the details of the currently displayed configuration including Name Revision level Type Location and Display time of the tree Session Properties F General Structure Visualisation BBB Rev fo Type Ps tt Location Loca Displayed 13 17 05 Display Hidden Attributes ve Yes HO OK C l ance Structure Tab The Structure tab shows statistics about the currently displayed product structure tree and the results from the most recent compare operation Seeder raya lie Gunu Structure l YEarUisialiuri Yull Taner Reiormnces anorte Highlighter HIAnn mki COMPARE zume DT crenl OK Cacel EPD Connect updates the structure page automatically to refle
3. EPD Connect User Guide 8 15 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Opening an Existing Assembly 6 If you query using a wildcard in the Name field select the desired assembly name from the Data Browser window rA SmE MILDE IMITICT 7 To activate an assembly choose the required Adrawing in the Adraw field 8 Specify additional options on the Open Assembly property sheet and click Open to open the assembly 9 Specify the following options for displaying the levels of the reference assemblies Option Description All Opens the assembly with all the reference assemblies fully expanded Level Opens the assembly with reference assemblies expanded to the number of levels that you specify The default level is 1 The assembly structure appears in the Product Structure window Viewed CADDS models appear in the CADDS Graphics window Opening an Assembly Using the Data Browser Menu You can quickly open an assembly using the Data Browser pop up menu 1 Select the required assembly name from within the Data Browser menu Mats Triawtie BEVIS Ti RTETIC SYSTE 8 16 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Opening an Existing Assembly 2 Position the cursor in the Data Browser window and press and hold the right mouse button 3 Choose Open from the pulldown menu Opening an Assembly Using the Information Browser Display the Data Browser menu by selecting the List All Assemblies option
4. Interference Detection Clash Detection Results Clash Options soft dash Hard Clash Soft Gash Tolerance f D yz Background Foreground Select Options clash Type Using Report Active Configurations _ py V Al v Al V Cadds Parts Geometry Frsi dash ADJ CONMPLETEL ADJ CONPL ETEL VY Selv All wv GBF Files Extents Atir vy AllGashes ADJ GONPLETEL VY Selv Sel GAF Files wz Extents v a iles Selv High BGF Fil Default Apply The Hard clash option is selected by default 3 Select the type of Clash detection you want to apply to the components Table 6 1 Clash Detection Options Clash options Description Hard Clash Calculates the actual physical clashes between the components you have selected Show as Clash Detects hard clashes between the components you have selected The contact tolerance see below has no effect on this type of clash Components that are physically interfering with other components clash as well as those components that are touching contact are reported as a hard clash regardless of the contact tolerance you have set No distinction is made between clashes and contacts Both are reported as clashes This is the default Show as Contacts Calculates contacts within the contact tolerance A distinction is made between clashes and contacts Components that are touching are reported as contacts Components that are physically interfering are reported as c
5. Database Defaults EDM User Hame Vault Database EDMADMIN PARTH UNIS User Name mdoulton Deferred transfer Ho w YES E T Overwrite on GET DOD Ho wA YES PAREN Overwrite on READ Vaults to Query we No ves W Loca W Remote OK l 2 Enter the User Name and select appropriate options 3 Customize your interactions with the Vault using the Yes and No options e Deferred Transfer Yes allows you to specify a delayed time for commands to be processed by the Vault This is required for submitting many commands in batch mode To report on the status of deferred transaction requests choose Database gt Deferred Status EPD Connect User Guide 7 7 Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options No causes commands to be processed immediately e Overwrite on GET Determines whether or not to overwrite the current version of a file by the same name on the local disk when you use the Get command e Overwrite on READ Determines whether or not to overwrite the current version of a file by the same name on the local disk when you use the Read command Invoking Database Transfer Actions STATUS When you select a data item from the list displayed in the Data Browser window or when you select a component in the product structure tree and then select a database transfer action such as Read Specific Rev the Vault Transfer Requests window opens WELT anser Regests
6. Zoom the view Zooming on page 5 6 Set the camera position Setting the Camera Position on page 5 7 2 bo Set the camera target Setting the Camera Target on page 5 7 Set the camera position and target Setting the Camera Position and Target on page 5 7 Measure the distance from the camera to a point Measuring Distance from Camera to Point on page 5 8 Measure the distance between two points Measuring Distance Between Two Points on page 5 8 Set the rendering controls Rendering on page 5 10 Move the camera in an angular and linear direction Moving the Camera on page 5 12 Set the working units Setting the Working Units on page 5 15 Select a graphic in the 3D Viewer Selecting and Scrolling on page 5 17 a window to scroll to and select the eo associated items in the product structure tree sae Selecta CADDS component or an ___ Selecting Application Objects on page 5 18 a application object in the 3D viewer window EPD Connect User Guide 5 3 Using the 3D Viewer Setting the Viewer Session setting the Viewer Session To use the 3D Viewer create a session and add geometry to it Creating a New Session irere To create the initial and additional sessions click the icon for creating a new session When you create a new session all data from the current session
7. Display Buffering Set the display buffering to single or double as follows e Single Displays each item as it is rendered e Double Displays items only after they are all completely rendered This provides a more realistic view during such operations as camera or item traversal and any walk through operations Please note Fora more realistic view use double buffering when performing such operations as camera or item traversal and any walk through operations EPD Connect User Guide 5 11 Using the 3D Viewer Moving the Camera Moving the Camera l You can move the camera in an angular or linear direction Set the direction of the camera by selecting tools from the Tools palette Click the Tools icon to open the Tools palette Moving the Camera in an Angular Direction The orbit tools enable you to move the camera position in an angular direction What you see when you use the orbit angle tools is relative to the camera target To change the camera target 1 Click the icon for setting the camera target 2 Select a new target point in the 3D Viewer window Please note You cannot orbit upside down Set the number of degrees that the camera position orbits using the Orbit Angle slider scale For more details on setting units see Setting the Working Units on page 5 15 5 12 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Moving the Camera The orbit tools are Orbit Left enables you to
8. EPD Connect Files The following tables lists the EPD Connect files and their usage File Usage bin epdconnect New executable file that includes source code changes for dVISE scripts Connect Requires PVS_EXTERNAL CA_TEMP nav2vis because dciepd does not read reposit explorer ini data reposit explorer ini Addition of various environment variables for DIVISION MockUp integration data reposit C optnavea ini Defines warning messages for Cut Copy and other such triggers data reposit C optnavui ini Defines help messages for the 3D viewer for example Set 3D viewer data resource main r Defines entry point for Viewer select menu data optegra msg Beware of tabs Registers dciepd into CMOM messaging data explorer reports load pl Small addition for CVDPA_ DVISE_ TYPE data explorer reports convert pl Same as above data explorer convert CADDS CADDS part conversion script Modified for DIVISION MockUp integration data explorer convert CATMODEL CATIA part conversion script Modified for DIVISION MockUp integration data resource bclash r Resource file sets the type of file to BGF files in the Interference Detection dialog box data explorer reports clashact pl Perl script performs the clash detection data menus C expview m Menu file for selecting Viewer data explorer viewer list file List of possible viewers data
9. The setting in 1 will always override this setting e The current working environment may have a variable set which will be used in the absence of the preceding two settings EPD Connect User Guide 15 13 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model e This variable can also be set in EPD_HOME data aec2ps reposit aec2ps ini This setting is used in the absence of any of the preceding settings The value specified for domsnetd is the port number used by the DBMS for communication purposes This value can be extracted from the etc rpc file located on the host running the DBMS process ORACLE SID specifies the instance of Oracle on the host running the DBMS application that will be connected to AEC2PS USER XXXX User ID for accessing the AEC database AEC2PS PASSWORD XXXX The scrambled user password for accessing the AEC database Can be generated using the executable scramexe located in EPD_HOME bin directory AEC2PS ATTRNAME MODE x The settings made to customize the exported attribute names The following values can be assigned to this variable 1 This is the default value It uses the column names in the AEC database as attribute names 2 This setting extracts the attribute name from the AEC2PS_ATTR_FILT file 3 This uses a concatenated value of the fields AEC_PROP_PROPNAME and AEC_PROP_SEQUENCE of the AEC property dictionary table This setting results in the unif
10. This is the default When more than a single rule is defined this operator combines the rules and highlights the nodes that satisfy all the rules e OR When more than a single rule is specified this operator combines the rules and highlights the nodes that satisfy any of the rules 3 Choose an Action button The actions that can be performed are e Templates Displays Rules templates e Add Adds a new Rule EPD Connect User Guide 4 13 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules e Change Allows you to edit an existing rule e Delete Removes an existing rule 4 Select the attribute to which you are applying a comparison in the attribute list on the left 5 Select a test option See page 4 8 for a brief description of each operator 6 Select an attribute from the attribute list on the right 7 Select the type of component to which the test applies e Component Tests two attributes of the same component e Parent Tests an attribute of a component against an attribute of its parent e Assembly Tests an attribute of a component against an attribute of its subassembly 8 Click Apply to create the attribute comparison rule 9 Click Highlight to apply the rule to the product structure For example the preceding screen image shows that the user is asking EPD Connect to highlight the components where either the cost is greater than the planned cos
11. 7 46 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault Column Name Description USER TYPE User Type PART NO Part Number DESCRIPTION Description CLASS CODE Class Code UPDATE USER Update User DATE Update Date TIME Update Time STORE USER Store User DATE Store Date TIME Store Time ACTION USER Action User DATE Action Date TIME Action Time REGISTRATION Registration REPLICATION Replication TARGET VAULT Target Vault TARGET USER Target User NO READ Permissions assigned to the file REQUEST RVW_ COMMENT Request Review Comment RESPOND RVW_ COMMENT Respond Review Comment To see the default settings for a column select it The default values of the Visible Pinned Width Description and Edit Default fields are displayed You can customize these settings and make them the default by selecting Yes in the Edit Default field 3 Click Apply Please note To revert to the default settings for a column click Load Defaults EPD Connect User Guide 7 47 Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault Saving the Query Results You can save the results of a query in the Data Browser as a text file that can be exported to any spreadsheet application for further modification To save the results of a query as a text file perform the following steps 1 Click Save in the Data Browser window The SAVE
12. Click Apply to add the application to your EPD Connect configuration Click Cancel to exit the window 2 56 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Launching Applications from Product Structure Components Associating Components with Applications After you have defined an application environment execute the following steps to associate a component in a product structure tree with the application 1 Select a component in the product structure tree 2 Choose File gt Properties to edit its attributes Choose Edit gt Add to add a new component The Add Component dialog box opens 3 Edit the Associated Item attribute field a Click Application in the Associated Item field b From the drop down list box select the application you want to associate with the component the application you defined will be included in the list Add Cenpanent Paron l Huis geer Hoe 1 Instance Huniber ull ASSOC bed Iter at Hone Hem Mane Auviskal Editing the launch ini file The launch ini file contains the information required to execute the command to launch the application It contains two entries for each application e View Points to the application to be launched when you are authorized only to view the component e Mod Points to the application to be launched when you are allowed to view and modify the component In the UNIX environment the file is located in EPD_HO
13. Querying Vault data see Chapter 7 Working with Vault Data Transferring Vault data see Chapter 8 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Connect User Guide 14 3 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Features Displaying STEP Folders and Files The Information Browser displays STEP folders as it does any other folders that reside on the local system The following figure shows the STEP folders listed in the Information Browser STEP files may also be stored in the Vault nodes If they are you must first use the get command to place them in the local hierarchy before you open them To save them as Vault files nodes use the appropriate Vault functionality To display the contents of a STEP folder click it The Data Browser opens and displays the names of the STEP files that are in the folder as shown in the following illustration Data Browser Local Vaull NAME REVISION STATUS SYSCO0DE UNER TYPE SERI STEPALOO STE STEPALUL STE STEPALO STE STEPALOG STE STEPALOM STP STEALS STE STEPALOG STP STEPALIY STP STEPALO STE STEPALOUS STE STEPAA STE STEPAALOI STE STEPAALO STE STEPAALOD STF STEPAALOA STP STEPAALOS STP STEPAALOG STE STEPAALO STE STEPAALOD STE feed jei jea pei fs jk j feed ak ef fc fk fk et Refresh oe ee A a E Opening Product Structures That Originate as STEP Files From the Data Browser you can display a STEP file as a product structure in the Product Structure
14. on page 4 6 Open the Product Structure tree on which the Global renumbering is to be executed Global Renumber Global Renumbering of Nodes on page 4 25 Define highlighting rules that Highlight Creating Highlighting determine which components are Rules on page 4 10 highlighted on the currently displayed component tree Define visibility rules that determine Visibility Creating Display Rules on which components are hidden from the displayed tree page 4 14 EPD Connect User Guide 4 29 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Creating and Clearing Display Conditions Table 4 6 Display Command Options Continued To Create this Display Condition Choose this Command For Details Refer to Navigate the tree by specified criteria Browser Browsing for Components on page 4 26 Highlight all selected components Select gt Highlighted Highlight all nonselected components Select gt Not Highlighted Highlight all the components that have a direct link to a selected component Select gt To Root Select all components with the same access indicator color Select gt Color Selecting Components by the Access Indicator on page 4 9 Select all highlighted components Component selection mode must be set to multiple Highlight gt Selected Hiding Selected or Highlighted Components on page 2
15. Advantages The following are the advantages Compress node improves viewing of the product structure You can open the product structure in compressed or uncompressed mode You can open the product structure even if the whole structure is not compressed uncompressed Steps through 3 are achieved in product structure file format without any changes It improves the visibility of the CM structure You can compress or uncompress a partial or a whole tree in the product structure window by selecting the nodes independently This is an independent functionality within EPD Connect and does not block any other functionality or command available in EPD Connect Limitations The following are the limitations 1 Compress node is applicable to only end leaf nodes at the same level that are attached to the same parent 2 Compress node is not applicable to the reference nodes 4 24 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Global Renumbering of Nodes Global Renumbering of Nodes You can renumber the instances of a class in an active product structure tree Renumbering Nodes of All Classes To renumber the nodes of all classes in an active Product Structure window 1 Choose View gt Global Renumber The Global Renumbering for Class Names dialog box opens 2 Select the All option from the Class Selection field 3 To restart numbering at 1 choose the Start from 1 option and click
16. Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree The Edit Menu 3 2 Options for Editing Components 3 2 Editing the Properties of a TIM Component 3 3 Contents viii EPD Connect User Guide Limitations and Restrictions 3 3 Adding Components 3 4 Creating New Components 3 4 Adding a Component with Mirror Flag 3 7 Example 3 7 Adding a Component on a Compressed Node 3 7 3 8 Adding TIM Components Editing the Tree Structure 3 9 Cutting and Pasting the Components 3 9 Copying Components 3 10 Copying and Pasting from the Data Browser 3 11 Undoing and Restoring Previous Editing 3 12 Swapping Component Positions 3 12 Reordering Components 3 13 Positioning Components 3 13 Sorting Components 3 14 Setting Global Attributes 3 16 Copying Instance Attributes 3 17 3 18 Setting Revision Levels Setting Revision Levels of a Component 3 18 Changing the Revision Levels of a Component 3 18 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Selecting and Displaying Components 4 2 Setting the Component Selection 4 2 Setting Component Text Display 4 3 4 5 Setting the Component Text Font Setting the Component Display Rules 4 6 Creating Access Indicator Rules 4 6 Changing a Rule 4 9 Deleting a Rule 4 9 Selecting Components by the Acces
17. EPD Connect maintains an audit log to provide information on command processing Messages are sent to the audit log as the commands are processed Choose Help gt Audit Log to display the audit log The audit log is also displayed when you issue certain commands relating to database transfers 2 38 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Working with Multiple CVPATHS Working with Multiple CVPATHS You can select and apply a CVPATH to the current EPD Connect session You can also edit directories of a selected CVPATH in the structure mode as well as the NAV CAMU mode Please note You can use the edited CVPATH only in the currently active EPD Connect session It is not valid for the other dynamic applications that are invoked from EPD Connect For example the changes made to the CVPATH variable defined in CADDS are not reflected in EPD Connect and vice versa When you start a new EPD Connect session all of the environment variables with the prefix CVPATH are scanned These variables are treated as the selected CVPATHs and displayed If the variable with the prefix CVPATH are not found in the environment the CVEPD_ INIT cvepd ini file is scanned Please note IfaCVPATH variable is found in the environment it is not looked for in the cvepd ini file even if an entry has been made in the cvepd ini file The CVPATH variables are generally set in the cvepd ini file on the Windows platform and epdconn ini or
18. Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Features Features The single tree generation for the product data has the following features The currently active product structure in EPD Connect is used for generating the single DB in CAMU All visible nodes of the product structure are considered for the single DB generation Hidden nodes are ignored during the single DB generation Components in the single DB are displayed in the same order as they are displayed in the Product Structure window The revision of the model remains the same in both the PS tree and the single DB The single DB that is activated in CADDS CAMU is closed automatically when the corresponding tree is closed in the Product Structure window If the product structure is not active in EPD Connect or the single DB is not active in CAMU the orientation changes are not reflected in EPD Connect The orientation changes are reflected only for those nodes that are present in the active product structure while generating the single DB The orientation changes are not reflected for those nodes that are added or deleted from the active product structure after generating the single DB EPD Connect User Guide A 3 Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Generating and Activating a Single DB Generating and Activating a Single DB To generate and activate a single DB file 1 Set the ENABLE _SINGLE_TREE variabl
19. Using the Product Structure Window Closing and Expanding Reference Components 2 In the Product Structure window click to select the parent node of one or more reference components 3 Choose File gt Open The display is refreshed Closing One or More Reference Components To close one or more expanded reference components so that their subcomponents are hidden 1 Select one or more components 2 Choose File gt Close Ref If you have modified one or more components and did not save it you are prompted before the reference component is closed A triangular access indicator after the unexpanded node indicates that it can be expanded Expanding and Closing Hidden Reference Components When reference components are selected and then hidden they remain selected after they become invisible You can therefore expand and close these components if you set the EXPAND HIDDEN variable in epdconn ini The values are as follows e If set to 0 reference components that are selected but hidden are not expanded or closed e If set to 1 reference components that are selected but hidden are expanded or closed EPD Connect User Guide 2 17 Using the Product Structure Window Hiding Selected or Highlighted Components Hiding Selected or Highlighted Components You can hide the selected or highlighted components Hiding components removes them from the display but keeps the data accessible When you close a reference co
20. s data is stored in and the Vault displayed by default This control is only enforced in the Store and Copy windows 1 Select Admin gt Appl Project to add change or delete Application or Project relationships Iphin 4 Aci Coy DHMH Appdecnln wont E liHlmill gt Hx nga rsi 7 i EL 2 Select Option to add change or delete an Application Project relationship If you select Change or Delete select an existing association from the list 3 Select one of the Applications from the list 4 Select a Project to associate to the Application If no relationships exist for the application the Project list will contain all the Vaults that the user has write access to 5 In Default specify whether the project is to be the default project for the application 6 Click Apply to add change or delete the attribute definition B 8 EPD Connect User Guide Options for System Administrators Switching the DOD switching the DOD In a Distributed Vault environment where multiple Distributed Object Directories DOD are configured for a particular Vault you can dynamically switch to another DOD when the designated primary DOD is inaccessible A DOD switch is checked for and executed only on the Vaults specified in the ANSPATH variable for the current EPD Connect session Please note Make sure that the file specified by the ANSPATH variable contains e A list of all the primary and secondary DODs for a given Vau
21. Choose Database gt Vault gt Distribute The Distribute Vault Items dialog box opens L st bute volt tem Ceslitaile selected ilenrs fur Tu onl Lisl se Mite Hew se Upate x Hepar ne py x Mave S Apply Canal 3 Specify mode of distribution of the object by choosing the appropriate options Option Description Write The object is distributed to only one Vault with write authorization Read The object is distributed to a list of Vaults with read only authorization Update The object is to be updated in the Vault or Vaults specified Replace The object is to replaced in the Vault or Vaults specified Copy Copy an object into a remote Vault list The Vault list may contain multiple Vaults Move Move an object into a remote Vault list Only one Vault name is allowed 7 40 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 4 Click Apply to transfer the request to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box 5 Select the object Click Apply to distribute it Listing Information about a Vault Item You can obtain information about a Vault item including its file attributes that is present in the Vault You can also obtain details of files residing on the local workstation Follow these steps 1 Select the item from the Data Browser window or its component in the product structure tree 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Info from the window i
22. Clash Detection and Zoning Detecting Clashes Please note If more than one Product Structure window with the product structure tree is open clash detection is performed on the components of the product structure that was active before opening the Interference Detection dialog box Clash Detection in Background Mode To perform a clash detection operation in background mode do the following 1 Choose Tools gt Clash Detection from the EPD Connect toolbar The Interference Detection dialog box opens 2 Select the Background option in the Interference Detection dialog box to open the Available Configurations For Background Batchclash panel 3 To add the configurations on which you want to perform Batchclash click Add Input in the Interference Detection dialog box The Background BatchClash Add Configuration dialog box opens Use this dialog box to select the configurations on which you want to perform clash detection and add them to the Available Configurations For Background Batchclash panel For details of field descriptions in the Background BatchClash Add Configuration dialog box refer Opening a Product Structure Tree on page 2 9 4 Click Apply in the Interference Detection dialog box On clicking Apply the clash detection operation is run in the background mode on the added configurations 5 Click the Results tab in the Interference Detection dialog box Select a configuration from the list displayed e Click
23. EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface to CADDS GET and READ Dependent Objects You can get or read the referenced objects when you perform the get or the read operations on the Vault objects To do so set the value of the variable CA PROCESS REF OBJECTS to YES in the epdconn ini file You can display all the referenced Vault objects by setting the Expand References option to All in the Open Configuration dialog box pside plolseu l Jz i F i sudecplae 1 J sern o iy 7 lt E ca muater amag I ET Ma sts go o l Vy a Iiet 4 f Zide pls e i 4 EPD Connect User Guide 8 39 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface to CADDS In the above figure the Vault objects are displayed with the referenced components in the Product Structure window Reference Objects The Reference Objects dialog box allows you to specify the referenced objects to get GET LIST and the referenced objects to read READ LIST After clicking OK the referenced objects in GET LIST and the referenced objects in READ LIST are got and read after the main object is got and read The audit log displays the individual status of the get and read operation After processing all selected Vault objects a summary message is displayed in the Audit Log and EPD Connect message window This message displays the total objects selected for get the total objects successfully got the total obj
24. Explore Multiple product structure trees 15 6 Product structure trees 15 5 Export CADDS parts and assemblies 8 22 F Features 11 3 12 3 13 3 File menu Close 2 32 Close Ref 2 17 Compare 2 25 Exit 1 19 Memory 2 23 New 2 8 Open 2 9 Properties 2 4 Save 2 30 Save As 2 30 Saving multiple product structure trees 2 30 Session Summary 2 33 Fileset 7 33 Prefix B 12 Font setting for product structure 4 5 G Global attributes editing 3 16 H Hard clash detection 6 6 Help menu Audit Log 2 38 Hidden component Components Hidden 2 18 Hide Display menu 5 21 Hide View menu 2 18 Highlight Display menu 5 24 Highlighting Rules creating 4 10 Icon 3D Viewer 5 2 C 2 4 Clipboard 2 6 Close Configuration 2 5 Copy 2 5 Cut 2 5 Data Browser window 2 4 E 2 4 Exit application 2 5 Highlight components 2 6 M 2 4 Node selection 2 5 Open New Configuration 2 5 P 2 4 Paste 2 5 Redo 2 5 Reorder components 2 5 S 2 4 Save Configuration 2 5 Selection for nodes 2 5 Structure Overview 2 4 Swap components 2 5 Undo 2 5 Icons on toolbar 2 5 Import Pro ENGINEER parts and assemblies 8 22 Information Browser Introduction 1 8 Vault data 7 50 Instance attributes Copying 3 17 Interface MEDUSA 11 1 Interference checking 6 2 ISO 10303 STEP interface 14 2 Item Properties 2 4 Item Properties dialog 2 4 Index 4 EPD Connect User Guide Index L launch ini file editing 2 57 Launching applications From Produc
25. Netscape Communications Corporation in the U S and other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation OrbixWeb is a registered trademark of IONA Technologies PLC PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide Rational Rose is a registered trademark of Rational Software Corporation RetrievalWare is a registered trademark of Convera Corporation RosettaNet is a trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet a non profit organization SAP and R 3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International Inc in the United States and in other countries Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems Inc STHENO is a trademark of CAD Schroer GmbH Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo Solaris UltraSPARC Java and all Java based marks and The Network is the Computer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and in other countries VisTools is a trademark of Visual Kinematics Inc VKI VisualCaf is a trademark of WebGain Inc WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications Inc Microsoft Windows Windows NT Visual Basic and the Visual Basic logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporat
26. Product structures opened in the EPD Connect browser for CATIA are intended for viewing purposes only Do not attempt to modify displayed structures by adding or deleting nodes The File gt Save function for CATIA is not supported by the EPD Connect interface If you execute a File gt Save command no data is written to disk The following message is displayed Successfully saved 1 of 1 For additional information regarding e Process flow refer to Appendix C Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands e Working with product structure refer to e Chapter 2 Using the Product Structure Window e Chapter 3 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree e Chapter 4 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window e Querying Vault data refer to Chapter 7 Working with Vault Data e Transferring Vault data refer to Chapter 8 Using CAMU in EPD Connect 13 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Features Features The EPD Interface for CATIA allows you to e Interact with Vault using EPD Connect e Query the Vault for CATIA items according to where stored or last changed e Read Skins SKI and Dynamic Skins SKD from CATIA Improve color processing by providing a better RGB match e Work with CATIA model files and assemblies reading them without regard to the size of the models e View CATIA assembly product structure in EPD Connect e Display CATIA models in the
27. Using the Product Structure Window Plotting a Tree Structure Plotting a Tree Structure You can create a binary CGM file format of a tree as it is displayed in the Product Structure window and plot it Please note This feature is available only on UNIX platforms Creating a Binary CGM File To create a binary CGM file of an Access Ware tree that is displayed in the Product Structure window 1 Display a product structure tree 2 Choose File gt Plot gt Create CGM File The nonmodal Create CGM File dialog box opens Create COM File 3 Enter the directory name in which the CGM file is to be created Use the variable CA_PLOT_DIR in the epdconn ini file to set the default directory EPD Connect User Guide 2 49 Using the Product Structure Window Plotting a Tree Structure 4 Enter the name of the file that is to be created in the CGM File Name field If you do not provide the file name an error message is displayed 5 Select an appropriate file suffix option e No File Suffix The file is created without the cgm suffix when this option is selected Otherwise the suffix is appended to the file Please note If you provide the suffix as a part of the file name the system does not append any other suffix even if the option No File Suffix is deselected e Overwrite File The file that is created overwrites the file with the same name if it is in the same directory 6 Specify the paper size in the P
28. Working with EPD Visualizer Working with EPD Visualizer To display the hierarchy of the application objects using Visualizer 1 2 Start EPD Connect Select the CADDS model in the Product Structure window and explore it as explained in Working with Application Objects in the Product Structure Window on page 15 5 Choose Tools gt 3D Viewer from the EPD Connect menu bar View the model in the Visualizer Choose Select gt Selection Masks The following menu appears e Graphics File Disciplines Group Item Choose the Graphics File option to select the required CADDS component in the Visualizer window This is the default option You can perform the following Visualization operations on the associated CADDS component e Select e Scroll to e Select and Scroll to e Deselect e Deselect all e Select Selected e Highlight Selected e Highlight Interferencing For details of the above options refer to the EPD Visualizer User Guide Choose the Item option to select the required application object in the Visualizer window The operations mentioned above can be performed on the associated application objects 15 8 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Working with EPD Visualizer Detecting Clashes To detect clashes of the application objects using the Visualizer 1 Select the CADDS model in the Product Structure window and explore the applicati
29. You can print the report or save it to a file Please note You may get the message Failed to create report during a clash detection if clash detection is performed on unsaved active product structures A mismatch occurs between the saved product structure and the active product structure To avoid such a situation always save the product structure before performing clash detection 6 6 EPD Connect User Guide Clash Detection and Zoning Zoning ZONING A zone is an encapsulated region of an assembly used to detect clash areas Zones are created as boxes or cylinders You can select previously created zones and activate them Zones are shown in red Zoning identifies the component that belongs to a selected zone by detecting which components clash in the selected zone represented as a nonoriented component for example component positioned in global space Please note There is no plane to apply a symmetry to a zone The environment variable CVDPA_ZONES_ DIRin the explorer file points to the directory where the zones are stored If the directory does not exist or if the environment variable is not set CVDPA_ZONES_ DIR is set to SHOME zones anda subdirectory called Suser_name _bcd is created The newly created zones are stored in this subdirectory Activating Zones To select and activate previously created zones and to use them to perform interference checking do the following 1 Choose Tools gt Zoning
30. caddsrce local on the UNIX platform Please note Any path name in the caddsrc 1local file that is longer than 40 characters is ignored from that CVPATH and a message is added to the log The following example shows sample files that are scanned for the CVPATHs For Windows C Windir s cvepd ini CVPATH C users create C C users parts1 CVPATHA C usri1 parts1 C usr2 parts C usr3 parts For UNIX setenv CVPATH users abc parts users ps parts1 setenv CVPATHA users parts parta users parts parta Aparts Set the above variables in caddsrc local Please note The format of the ini files is the same on Windows and UNIX platforms EPD Connect User Guide 2 39 Using the Product Structure Window Working with Multiple CVPATHS setting the CVPATH Variable When you set the CVPATH variable e Do not include environment variables in the list of paths e If the paths contain environment variables replace them with their values e On Windows use a semicolon to separate the paths e On UNIX use a colon to separate the paths For example if the default CVPATH variable in the SEPD HOME data reposit cvepd ini file is CVPATH SEPD HOME parts C CA ASSYPREFIX CA READPREFIX then if you are using the cvepd ini file e On Windows set the CVPATH variable to CVPATH usr apl edm parts C usr apl edm parts usr apl edm parts read e On UNIX set the CVPATH variable to CVPATH usr apl edm parts C usr apl edm
31. is set to ON e AEC2PS2NAV SEPD TEMP aec2ps2nav The name of the file that communicates with EPD Connect and displays error messages e AEC2PS SIGNAL ENABLED 0 The setting for extracting the signal attribute for cables The default value is 0 which disables this setting e AEC2PS SEG CLASS ENABLED 0 The setting for extracting the segment class for segments The default value is 0 which disables this setting e AEC2PS DISPLAY SUPPORTS 0 The setting for displaying support as a part of the main tree The default value is 0 which disables this setting e AEC2PS ASM ADD REF 0 AEC2PS CABLING ADD REF 0 The setting for adding duplicate reference nodes to the trees for ASM and Cabling objects Set the value to 1 to add duplicate nodes The default value is 0 which disables the above setting EPD Connect User Guide 15 15 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model e AEC2PS REV SEPERATOR The setting that determines the separator character for the name and the revision A single character must be given as a separator CA NODE EXP COLOR 5 The indicator color on the explored nodes can be changed by setting appropriate values The default value is 5 AEC2PS DEBUG OFF The setting for displaying the log messages in the DEBUG mode The default value is OFF AEC2PS EXPLORE OTHERNODES 1 The setting for displaying the phantom nodes of the application obje
32. of Adobe Systems Parasolid Electronic Data Systems EDS Windchill Info Engine Server contains IBM XML Parser for Java Edition and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition Pop up calendar components Copyright 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation All Rights Reserved TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix Technologies Ltd Apache Server Tomcat Xalan and Xerces are technologies developed by and are copyrighted software of the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org their use is subject to the terms and limitations at http Awww apache org LICENSE txt UnZip 1990 2001 Info ZIP All Rights Reserved is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND For the complete Info ZIP license see ftp ftp info zip org pub infozip license html Gecko and Mozilla components are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1 1 at http www mozilla org MPL Software distributed under the MPL is distributed on an AS IS basis WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the MPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations Technology Powered by Groove is provided by Groove Networks Inc Technology Powered by WebEx is provided by WebEx Communications Inc Acrobat Reader is Copyright 1998 Adobe Systems Inc Oracle 8i run time Copyright 2000 Oracle Corporation The Java Telnet Applet StatusPeer java TelnetlO java TelnetWrapper java TimedOutExcepti
33. 12 caddsrb ini e Setup Before using the CADDS Interface using the Command Line Interface set the CVEPD INIT to and CVEPD MAIN CONFIG to SEPD_HOME data reposit epdconn ini in your environment e Store You can configure for the type of CADDS files that will go as a CADDS part in the Vault The part to be stored will be searched in the current directory if the fully qualified path is not specified in the filename The selection name for the part in the Vault is in uppercase characters 8 8 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Connect Interface for CADDS e Get The part is created in the local directory specified in the environment variable CVCREATEDIR If it is not set the part is created in the current directory e Read The part is created in the local directory specified in the environment variable CA_READPREFIX This setting is available in epdconn ini e Open You can control the opening of the reference assemblies of a PS or a CAMU file from a read only area by using the NO WRITE_OPEN_REFASM variable e If the value of this variable is set to YES the reference assemblies are opened in read only mode e If the value of this variable is set to NO the default the reference assemblies are not opened EPD Connect User Guide 8 9 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface for CADDS Support EPD Interface for CADDS Support The following table gives information on how the CADD
34. 16 Please note In addition to the attributes and values defined in the external file the Attribute and the Value lists show the following respectively e The new attributes and values you have defined in the active EPD Connect session e The existing assembly attributes and values in the _ps file 2 22 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation M You can save displayed trees locally in memory Trees remain in memory only for the duration of the current EPD Connect session You can perform the following e Putone tree aside temporarily to look at another and retrieve it when you need it again e Open another tree from the File menu or open a product structure tree that is already in the active memory e Compare one tree with another tree e Cut and paste components from one tree to another tree To save a tree in memory 1 Choose File gt Memory or click the Memory icon The Memory dialog box opens CONFIGURATION IN MEMORY ENGSOL1 Option save y Restore Delete Name PSFILE Rev Appl Ps Time 12 27 06 Close ves Mo OK Apply Cancel l EPD Connect User Guide 2 23 Using the Product Structure Window Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation 2 Select an option in the Option field Perform the corresponding steps Option Procedure Save To retain the
35. 18 Select all components that are not highlighted Component selection mode must be set to multiple Highlight gt Not Selected Hide all selected components A subassembly is only hidden if all its components are hidden Hide gt Selected Hide all components that are not selected Hide gt Not Selected Identify the common parent component for a group of selected components by selecting the parents Link gt Selected Identify the common parent component for a group of highlighted components by highlighting the parents Link gt Highlighted Trace the inter component links from a selected component to the root component Traced lines are changed to a distinctive color Trace Selected Highlight all selected components and Hide the components Hide gt Highlighted Hiding Selected or Highlighted Components on page 2 18 4 30 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Creating and Clearing Display Conditions Clear Menu The Clear menu provides options for clearing the display selections made with the View menu The following table briefly explains the operations you can perform with the Clear menu Table 4 7 Clear Menu Options To Create this Display Condition Choose this Command Deselect all selected components All Selected Turn off linking to common parent components All Links Tur
36. 23 Compress Mode 2 24 Comparing Two Trees 2 25 Obtaining a Comparison Report 2 28 Saving a Report 2 29 Printing a Report 2 29 Comparing TIM Components 2 29 Saving and Closing a Product Structure Tree 2 30 Saving a Product Structure Tree Locally 2 30 Saving a Product Structure Tree as a New Tree 2 30 Saving a Subset of the Tree 2 31 Saving the TIM Components of a Product Structure Tree__ 2 31 Closing a Product Structure Tree 2 32 Status and Report Windows 2 33 EPD Connect User Guide Contents vii Session Summary 2 33 General Tab 2 34 Structure Tab 2 34 Component Status 2 35 Component Comparison Status 2 36 ADRAW Items 2 37 Indicator Key 2 37 Clip Board 2 38 Audit Log 2 38 Working with Multiple CVPATHS 2 39 Setting the CVPATH Variable 2 40 Selecting a CVPATH 2 4 Editing a CVPATH 2 42 Printing and Displaying Reports 2 44 Printing Product Structures 2 47 Plotting a Tree Structure 2 49 Creating a Binary CGM File 2 49 Plotting a Tree 2 50 Plotting from the File 2 51 Plotting from the Product Structure Tree 2 52 Setting Variables for Plotting 2 53 Launching Applications from Product Structure Components __ __ 2 55 Launching Applications 2 55 Defining Component Application Associations 2 55 Defining an Application Environment 2 56 Associating Components with Applications 2 57 Editing the launch ini file 2 57 Editing the cvepd ini File 2 58
37. 8 42 Preprocess routines MEDUSA 11 5 Primary DOD B 9 Primary view 3D Viewer 5 6 Print dialog 2 4 Printing UNIX 2 47 Windows NT 2 47 Printing documentation from Portable Document Format PDF file xxiii Printing report 2 29 EPD Connect User Guide Index 5 Index Pro Engineer parts Importing 8 22 Pro FLY THROUGH Accessing 10 7 Integration with EPD Connect 10 1 Setting the environment 10 4 System requirements Hardware 10 13 Memory 10 13 Product overview 1 2 Product structure tree Adding components 3 4 Browse 4 26 Browsing configuration 4 26 Changing component positions 3 12 Clearing display selections 4 31 Closing a tree 2 32 Closing and expanding components 2 16 Comparing 2 25 Controlling display 4 2 Copying components 3 10 Creating new 2 8 Displaying subtree components 2 10 Edit global attributes 3 16 Highlighting 4 10 Opening 2 9 Opening a local tree 2 9 Opening from Vault 7 48 Plotting 2 52 Saving 2 30 Saving a subset of a tree 2 31 Scrolling 2 3 Storing in memory 2 23 Product Structure window About 2 2 Displaying graphics file 5 5 Displaying reports 2 44 Editing 2 19 Launching applications from 2 55 set component text 4 3 Set text font 4 5 Toolbar 2 4 Working with application objects 15 5 Product structure window Single 2 2 Q Query results Customizing 7 46 Saving 7 48 Querying Vault data 7 43 R Read Messages 7 13 Orientations A 7 Redoing an edit 3 12 Reference A 5 Assembly
38. CPRARD APPLCIN HEHE Lauch App as You can stack several items into this window then click Apply to invoke the transfer requests all at one time This action loads the transfer requests into a batch processor Please note This window can also be opened by choosing Window gt Transfer Requests Transferring Data and Starting Applications When you transfer a file from the Vault you can immediately start the application to display or edit the component being transferred by Setting Launch App to Yes 7 8 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options You can also launch applications associated with a component from the Product Structure window For a description of how to do so and of how to set up component or the application associations see Launching Applications on page 2 55 Deferred Vault Transactions To obtain a report on the status of any deferred Vault transaction choose Database gt Deferred Status to open the Deferred Status dialog box HTT RRO Stine Delete Entdes n il i BCRCICA gt Lompa User IOMAN A pe Any pending transactions are listed here EPD Connect User Guide 7 9 Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options searching for a Component You can determine which configuration trees contain a particular item such as an assembly a part or a file For example after finding a defective part you could select it in th
39. Clipboard 5 Choose Edit gt Paste to paste the components selected in the clipboard to the component selected in the Product Structure window You can also click Paste on the toolbar to perform the paste operation Please note EPD Connect automatically increments the instance number of pasted components that have the same class name as other components Copying Components Copying the components places them in the clipboard without removing them from the Product Structure window 1 Select the components you want to copy 2 Choose Edit gt Copy The clipboard appears displaying the copied components You can also click Copy on the toolbar to perform the copy operation When a compressed node is cut or copied to clip board it is in the clipboard in uncompressed mode When you paste from the clipboard to the product structure it is always done in uncompressed compressed mode depending upon the compressed state set in the environment EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the Tree Structure Copying and Pasting from the Data Browser To copy components from the Data Browser and place them in the clipboard 1 Select the components you want to copy 2 Press the right mouse button in the Data Browser and choose Copy from the pop up menu The clipboard appears displaying the copied components Data Erowser Clipboard eS Clear Gear Selected Cancel Refre
40. Connect cvepd ini file EPD Connect User Guide 2 55 Using the Product Structure Window Launching Applications from Product Structure Components Defining an Application Environment Defining applications is an administrative task In EPD Connect applications can also be referred to as rulebases because the application contains the rules that must be used to manage the data in a file To define an application environment 1 Choose Admin gt Appl Environment from the EPD Connect menu bar The Application Environment window opens deiliga doa Piei iren AEPLLLATAIUN MLZ LILLE LUH WILE ULI Cie FILE SOPCREATEO IH 4 PEM PILE an EPaATHill CHOIRS FLWATI STAOGMAE TILE SDA_ASSEERCFLE HS OGoril Pali N RFATANTA Eatin r Mid hap MAIRALA Syed ation worn a Crash DF SCAN RIFAT FOR Rand Dira et RECADTRCTIS View Hae CA_MLC_HIRCETO RY AM ies Hune En HLEA I HIHI E3 Buleh a res Finali n Yey Prl n Yey Care y Upper ae Hn nn nn Mimil aii Lower Crane Select LOCAL from the scrollable list at the top of the window Click Add in the Option field Choose the name of the application you are defining in the Application field for example MS WORD Enter a description for the application in the Description field If you are defining an application environment that will be associated with individual files you do not have to modify the remaining fields in the window
41. Data Manager LDM 1 Select File gt Enter LDM The LDM screen appears 2 Select an existing assembly to activate or create a new one Please note See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference to learn how to activate an assembly using the LDM EPD Connect User Guide 8 19 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Working on an Assembly Working on an Assembly When the Assembly mode is active select the Assembly folder in the Information Browser window the top menu bar and icons pertain to CAMU Most of the options on the File and Edit menus opens a CAMU property sheet This is also true of the icons There are four means of launching a CAMU property sheet from within a CAMU session that you have activated within EPD Connect e Menu commands such as File gt File Assembly With Options e Context sensitive menus available while your cursor is in the Product Structure window e CAMU icons across the top and side bars of the CADDS screen Please note 1 Please see the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu reference to learn about CAMU functionality menus property sheets and so forth 2 The popup menu may vary depending on the mode used to select the active node selection mode Using Attributes EPD Connect and CAMU use different attribute manipulation tools When you launch CAMU from within EPD Connect only EPD Connect type attribute manipulation tools are available However if you activate C
42. EPD Connect 3D Viewer or Visualizer EPD Connect User Guide 13 3 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Limitations Limitations The EPD interface for CATIA has the following limitations Existing CATIA assemblies can be opened in EPD Connect and stored to the Vault CATIA assemblies stored in the Vault cannot be directly opened from the database You must first retrieve get the CATIA files from the Vault to the local disk Similarly if you have a product structure _ ps file that includes CATIA data that CATIA data must exist on the local disk Redundant surfaces are read and converted as independent faces To use the EPD connect interface for CATIA with EPD Connect locally you must disable the existing Vault support If you want EPD Connect to list and recognize the application interface types but have not disabled Vault support then the first entry in the pm config must identify a Vault that is configured for the installed interfaces 13 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Working with CATIA Data in the Vault Working with CATIA Data in the Vault You can set up CATIA support on Vault and query Vault for CATIA data Setting Up CATIA Support on Vault To set up CATIA support on the Vault run the following as Vault administrator only after you have run either navinstall or navrefresh EPD_HOME install catinst kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
43. Enables you to add a child component to the selected component within the active assembly The CAMU Add Component property sheet is launched When you add a component that has a TIM object associated with it CAMU stores the TIM data of the associated object along with the rest of the component information in a PS file that is used for loading in EPD Connect Change Component Enables you to change some aspect of the selected component such as its name within the active assembly This launches the CAMU Change Component property sheet If the component that is being changed has any associated TIM components CAMU sends a message to EPD Connect to display the node as a TIM node Remove Component Enables you to remove the selected component within the active assembly This launches the CAMU Remove Component property sheet This action removes the associated model geometry from the assembly graphic within the 3D Viewer Edit Attributes Enables you to create or change nongraphic properties such as cost vendor material type and weight of the selected component within the active assembly See Using Attributes on page 8 20 Add Assembly Enables you to add an existing assembly as a child component of the selected component within the active assembly This launches the CAMU Add Assembly property sheet Change Assembly Enables you to change some aspect of the selected assembly component within the active assembly This la
44. For load method 1 the location is user specified directory in DIVISIONPATH whereas for load method 3 the location is a path that is derived from the CVPATH variable For load method 3 the location is generally a subset of the directories listed in the CVPATH variable that is those directories that reference parts EPD Connect User Guide 10 5 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Setting the User Environment To set the DIVISIONPATH variable to the same list of directories as your CVPATH remove the character from the following line in the GO script setenv DIVISIONPATH Qecho CVPATH sed s C g sed s g Q This setting of the DIVISIONPATH variable is suitable for load method 3 Please note You can modify the CVPATH variable after you start EPD Connect within the caddsrc or caddsrc local file a template caddsrc file or some other site specific configuration file You must ensure that the DIVISIONPATH and CVPATH variables contain the same list of directories This can be achieved by defining DIVISIONPATH in the same configuration file as CVPATH or by copying the path into the Go script Editing the dvise_epd_rc Script The dvise_epd_rc executable file is a C shell script that sets your environment The dvise _epd_ rc script is available in the etc epd userenv subdirectory of the DIVSION MockUp installation directory The minimum change that is required in this script is to assign
45. HAME REVISION STATUS SYSCODE UNER TPE USERID DOM 1 ry BLATEST LODH 1 Ty BEBFTEST BS LOOUL 1 Ty PERFTEST BS 10002 1 IW FERFTEST BS 10003 1 I FERFTEST ES 10004 1 I FERFTEST FS 1000h 1 Ty FPERFTEST BS LODGE 1 T PERFTEST BS LODO 1 Ty BEBFTEST BS LODE 1 Ty BEBFTEST BS 10009 1 IW FERFTEST PS 10010 1 I FERFTEST ES 10011 1 I FERFTEST ES 10013 1 I FERFTEST BS 10013 1 Iw PERFTEST BS TOOL 1 ry PERFTEST BS 10015 1 Ty BEBFTEST BS 10016 1 IW BERFTEST BS 10017 1 I FERFTEST BS t ee Refresh Options _ _Setecta__ Deseectan save cmi 2 Select a file to open 3 Press the right mouse button and choose Open from the popup menu Please note You can specify the name of a different file by choosing Open from this menu or by choosing File gt Open and then entering information in the Open Configuration window 4 The product structure tree for the file you selected is displayed in the Product Structure window EPD Connect User Guide 7 49 Working with Vault Data Working with Vault Data Using the Information Browser Working with Vault Data Using the Information Browser You can work with Vault data using the Information Browser that lists Vault folders and files in hierarchy Use the options available in the File and the Edit menus or in the popup menu that appears when you click the right mouse button on a file or the folder name See the Information Browser User Guide for det
46. Overview EPD Connect Components Environment availability is contingent upon the options installed The browser can be customized in response to each user s needs For more information about using the Information Browser see the Information Browser User Guide Product Structure Window The Product Structure window is a graphical tool that allows you to create edit browse and query any product structure or assembly It provides access to the many components that comprise complex product assemblies A product structure is displayed in the Product Structure window as a hierarchical tree showing logical relationships among product components The following figure shows a typical Product Structure window Product Structure j 100681 p Qe Mi clPlels aoe bh 1 10 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components The window displays a product structure as a hierarchical tree showing the logical relationships among components and their subassemblies Each component has identifying attributes that can be edited Attributes optionally associate a component with an application and assign it a geometric orientation You can query assembly and component attributes associated with the displayed product structure The common functions supported by the Product Structure window are Browse structure Use the tree structure to examine the relationships of components in large structures Travers
47. Read Only mode EPD Connect User Guide 8 7 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Connect Interface for CADDS e CA_STRTONOSTR This variable defines the relationship of the child nodes to the structure nodes after conversion of the structure node to a nonstructure node The default value of 0 removes all the child nodes of the structure node on conversion If the value of this variable is set to 1 the child nodes of the structure node become the child nodes of the converted nonstructure node e CA EDIT ATTR WITH SIGNOUT The default setting for this variable is 1 PTC strongly recommends that you use the default setting If you want to edit the attributes then sign out the Vault objects before you edit the attributes If the value of this variable is set to 0 you can edit the attributes without signing out the Vault objects e CA _LFNAME ADD PATH This variable allows you to set the value of the local file name LFNAME while storing objects e If the value of this variable is set to 0 the default the local file name LFNAME does not have the path added to the object name e Ifthe value of this variable is set to 1 the local file name LFNAME has the absolute path added to the object name This reduces the number of characters that can be stored e CA OUTPUT PREC This variable allows you to specify the precision value for storing the rotational or positional orientation The default value of this variable is
48. Release 7 with CADDS 5i Releases 12 and 13 in a locale with a non English audience edit the usr apl cadds scripts templates caddsrc file as follows to avoid problems with the localized versions of Optegra Original Entry in caddsrc Modification setenv LC_CTYPE C if 27LANG then if 2LC_CTYPE then setenv LC_CTYPE C endif endif setenv LANG C if 27LANG then setenv LANG C endif if mach_os ibm_aix3 amp amp if mach_os ibm_aix3 amp amp uname v 4 then uname v 4 then setenv LANG en_US if LANG then endif if SLANG C then setenv LANG en_US endif else setenv LANG en_US endif if 7LC_CTYPE then setenv LC_CTYPE C endif endif EPD Connect User Guide 8 3 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Connect Interface for CADDS EPD Connect Interface for CADDS The EPD Interface for CADDS is implemented with the Interface Toolkit The EPD Interface for CADDS looks for three repository files cvepd ini The environment variable CVEPD_INIT specifies the location of the cvepd ini Customize this file to override settings in the epdconn ini or caddsrb ini This file is not required So if cvepd ini is not customized set CVEPD INIT to to avoid the following warning Env variable CVEPD_ INIT is not set epdconn ini The environment variable CVEPD_MAIN_ CONFIG specifies the location of the epdconn ini Set CVEPD MAIN CONF
49. Renumber The nodes are renumbered starting at 1 Alternatively you can choose the Start From option to restart numbering at a number other than 1 Renumbering Nodes of a Specific Class To renumber the nodes belonging to a specific class 1 Choose View gt Global Renumber The Global Renumbering for Class Names dialog box opens 2 Select the Specific Class option from the Class Selection field The Class Name field appears 3 Select the class whose nodes you want to renumber from the Class Name list 4 To restart numbering at 1 choose the Start from 1 option and click Renumber The nodes are renumbered starting at 1 Alternatively you can choose the Start From option to restart numbering at a number other than 1 EPD Connect User Guide 4 25 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Browsing for Components Browsing for Components Locating components or a sequence of related components in a very large tree can be difficult using only the main product structure window The Browse Configuration panel allows you to navigate large trees to view designated components in the main window or in the Overview window The Browse facility is particularly useful when used in conjunction with the Component Status or Compare Status panels By opening these panels and leaving them displayed while browsing the tree you can check the attribute information for each component as it is located To browse for components fol
50. Reply Message dialog box which lets you reply to the displayed message by typing in a message area Respond Opens the Respond Review dialog box Use this option only to respond to a Request Review message with an approval or rejection See Responding to Reviews on page 7 30 for more information Delete Deletes the displayed message Send Opens the Send Message dialog box same as choosing Database gt Send Messages Refresh Checks to see if more messages have arrived since you opened the Read Messages dialog box EPD Connect User Guide 7 13 Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Changing the Vault User Password Authorized EPD Connect users can change their Vault signon password as follows 1 Choose Database gt Change Password The Change Password dialog box opens Change Passvord Old Masa word fob intr Now Possword Es a 2 Enter your old and new passwords into the appropriate fields Repeat the new password in the Confirm Password field 3 Click Change to change your password If an error message appears in the EPD Connect message line click Reset to clear the input fields and repeat the operation Refreshing the DOD During an EPD Connect session if a Distributed Object Directory goes offline your system administrator can switch to an alternate online DOD For more information see Switching the DOD on page B 9 Please note Switching a DOD affe
51. Scale option the paper size and the scaling factor for plotting the tree directly _ Plot Details Copies p Auto Scale Yes Orientation Portrait Landscape Click the Plot Details button to view the selected plotter type the units for plotting the maximum tree length in the X direction that can fit within the given paper size X size and the maximum tree length in the Y direction that can fit within the given paper size Y size in the Plot Setup Details dialog box that 2 52 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Plotting a Tree Structure appears The values displayed in the various fields of the dialog box are READ ONLY They are automatically populated when a Plotter is chosen from the Plotter Name list in the Plot menu Rot Setup Details E Plotter Type Units ra xX Size 184 Y Size 271 Close Please note Execute the plotter setup utility 1psetup before using the Plot option The Plotter Name list displays only those plotters on which lpsetup has been executed Refer to the PTC Plotter Drivers Administration Guide for details setting Variables for Plotting The cvups utility is used for plotting an Access Ware tree in EPD Connect The following settings in the cvups ini file located in the directory SEPD_HOME data cvups reposit are used for plotting e CVUPS MSG REP SEPD HOME data cvups SAWLANG cvups msg The directory location of the message files used for plo
52. Structure Setting Global Attributes Setting Revision Levels EPD Connect User Guide 3 1 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree The Edit Menu The Edit Menu The EPD Connect Edit menu provides options for adding cutting pasting copying and changing components in a tree configuration The Edit menu options are listed here along with brief descriptions Edit Menu Options Function Add Component Adds a component to the tree Swap Components Exchanges component positions Reorder Components gt Position Changes component order Reorder Components gt Sorting Sorts components in ascending or descending order Undo Undoes last edit Redo Restores edit after the Undo option Cut Cuts deletes components and transfers them to the clipboard Copy Copies components to the clipboard Paste Pastes components from the clipboard Global Attribute Edits assembly component attributes Set Revisions Sets selected items to the Vault revision value Unset Revisions Removes selected items from the Vault revision value Options Allows you to apply edits to a single node or multiple instances of a node Please note If more than one Product Structure window with a product structure tree is open you can perform the edit operations only on the components of the active product structure tree The Product Structure window in which you want to perform the undo or the redo opera
53. Structures ADRAWS You can perform the following Vault operations Store Get Read Update Replace Features The EPD Interface to CADDS provides The availability of Vault operations for CADDS Parts The capability of storing CAMU assemblies and Product structures in the vault as FILE EPD Connect User Guide 8 35 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Performing Vault Operations on CADDS e The ability to store ADRAWS automatically as PART while storing CAMU assemblies e The capability of storing ADRAWS independently using the Data Browser e The capability of populating Vault with the product structure attributes whenever a Product structure or a CAMU assembly is stored 8 36 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface to CADDS EPD Interface to CADDS The EPD Interface to CADDS collects an object along with related files if any when you execute a Vault command This section describe the steps for executing a Vault command You can perform Vault transactions on CADDS Parts CAMU Assemblies Product Structures and ADRAWSs You can use the Vault commands store replace update get and read on these objects You can also customize preprocessing and postprocessing during the execution of Vault Commands Store Update and Replace Commands When you execute a store command for a CADDS Interface supported object the interface 1 Searches for the existence of a CADDS object if a fully qualifie
54. Transparency Display menu 5 25 Tree font Customizing 4 5 Multiple product structure trees 4 5 U Undoing an edit 3 12 Unlock Vault items 7 18 Unregistering objects 7 35 Unsetting revisions 3 18 Unsubscribe 7 40 Unsubscribing objects Vault menu 7 40 Update TIM parts and assemblies 8 23 Vault items 7 17 V Vault Application defaults 7 6 Change password 7 14 Querying data 7 43 sending and responding to messages 7 12 Signon 7 5 Vault data Changing revision 7 26 Changing status of 7 25 Information about 7 41 Obtaining information about 7 41 Using Information Browser 7 50 Vault menu Change Revision 7 26 Change Status 7 25 Copy 7 17 Info 7 41 Register 7 34 Replace 7 17 Sign out 7 17 Store 7 18 Unlock 7 18 Unregister 7 35 Update 7 17 Vault query Searching for a component 7 10 Verify TIM parts and assemblies 8 23 View menu Access 4 7 Browser 2 36 4 26 Clear 2 18 4 31 Component Text 4 3 Control 4 2 Hide 2 18 Highlight 4 10 Link 4 30 Restore state 4 21 Save State 4 20 Select 4 30 Summary 4 29 Trace Selected 4 30 Tree Font Customizer 4 5 Visibility 4 14 Visibility rules 4 6 Access indicators 4 6 Display or hide 4 14 Highlighting 4 10 Saving to a template 4 16 Visualizer alternative viewer 1 14 W Web browser 1 16 Where Used 7 10 Window menu Attachment Window 2 37 Clipboard 2 38 Index 8 EPD Connect User Guide Index Component Status 2 35 Memor
55. Tree Structure 3 Select one of the following options e Asc Sorts the nodes in ascending order e Desc Sorts the nodes in descending order 4 Click Apply to sort the components EPD Connect User Guide 3 15 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Setting Global Attributes setting Global Attributes Option Attribute Value Type Group Global attributes are common assembly attributes any of which can be applied to a component in the assembly To add change or delete global attributes 1 Select the component whose attributes you want to edit 2 Choose Edit gt Global Attribute to open the Global Attribute Edit window Add Change v Delete 7V Instance class OK Cancel 3 Select an Option setting as follows e Add Change Adds a new attribute to the pool or changes the values of the attribute e Delete Deletes the attribute from the pool 4 Enter the details of the new attribute in the Attribute field Optionally enter a value for the attribute in the Value field You can select an attribute or value from the drop down list by clicking on the buttons adjacent to the Attribute and Value fields For information on defining attributes and values externally refer to Defining Assembly Attributes and Values Externally on page 2 21 5 Select a Type for the attribute either Instance or Class Part names consist of a class level and an instance level sepa
56. Using the Information Browser EPD Connect User Guide 7 1 Working with Vault Data The Data Browser Window The Data Browser Window EPD Connect provides a comprehensive facility for searching and listing information about data stored locally and in the Vault It also allows you to access and update this information This option is contained within the Data Browser window Using the Data Browser you can do the following Transfer data between your local disk and the Vault Search and list information without opening a configuration tree in the Product Structure window Save and export the results of a search Refer to Saving the Query Results on page 7 48 for more information Work interactively with the files and the tree structure along with the Product Structure window To open the Data Browser choose Window gt Data Browser from the EPD Connect menu bar or click the Data Browser icon To customize the field headings in the Data Browser set appropriate values to the following variables in the epdconn ini file CA_DESCR_LABEL lt description gt CA UTYPE LABEL lt user type gt CA _STYPE LABEL lt system type gt CA_GTCODE_LABEL lt GT code gt CA _PARTNO_ LABEL lt part number gt 7 2 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data The Data Browser Window Figure 7 1 Data Browser Window Hy Data Browser Local Wout NAHE REVISION STATUS SYSCO0E COWHER TIPE USERI DOO 1 Ty OLETE
57. Value field The Value field represents an arbitrary value against which to compare each attribute Enter a descriptive name for the rule in the Key field This name is reflected in the Color Key window accessed by choosing Window gt Indicator Key In the Ignore Case field select an option to specify whether or not you want the parameter in the Value field to be case sensitive Click Apply to create the rule OR Click Access to apply the rule to the tree components OR Click Clear to remove color coding from the component access indicators If more than one Product Structure window with the product structure tree is open the access rules that you apply are reflected only in the active product structure When you activate another product structure only the display of the product structure is refreshed and not the access rules Please note You can save access rules to a template and recall them when required For more information refer to Creating a Display Rules Template on page 4 16 4 8 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules Changing a Rule To change an existing rule 1 Select the rule you want to change from the data display list The data associated with the rule appears in the appropriate fields It is highlighted in red 2 In the Action field select Change 3 Modify the appropriate fields as required to change the
58. Vault operations on selected objects components choose a Vault transfer command by choosing Database gt Vault Please note To view the product structure of a stored CATIA model you must first retrieve the CATIA model file from the Vault and then open the assembly on your local disk into a product structure Working with the Data Browser To use the Data Browser 1 2 Choose Window gt Data Browser Choose the Vault folder to list the objects in the Vault database Choose the Local folder to list the objects on the local disk Choose Options The Query Options dialog box opens Choose Application to select one of the CATIA objects CATASSY or CATMODEL Click Apply or OK EPD Connect User Guide 13 7 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Working in EPD Connect 6 Select any object from the list and choose a Vault operation by choosing Database gt Vault Working with 3D Viewer and EPD Visualizer To load CATIA objects into the 3D Viewer or Visualizer 1 With a CATIA assembly active in the product structure window select the objects components you want to view 2 Choose Display gt Load gt Selected The selected objects corresponding gbf or gaf files are created and read into 3D Viewer or Visualizer For more information on the 3D viewer refer to Chapter 5 Using the 3D Viewer Working with CATIA Assemblies or Models To convert CATIA assemblies or models into gbf or gaf fil
59. View to view the clash detection results e Click Clash Input to view clash information Please note If there is an open a configuration in the active Product Structure window then the Interference Detection dialog box shows two options Background and Foreground If a configuration is not open in the Product Structure window then the Interference Detection dialog box shows only the Background option Viewing Clash Detection Results The results of clash detection are indicated by the indicator color of a component in the product structure tree and by the color applied to the corresponding component Descriptions of the colors used for hard clash and soft clash are described in the following section EPD Connect User Guide 6 5 Clash Detection and Zoning Detecting Clashes Hard Clash Detection The colors used for showing the results of hard clash detection are as follows e Orange A contact has occurred e Red An actual clash has occurred e Green No clashes have occurred Soft Clash Detection The color used for showing the results of soft clash detection is as follows e Yellow A clash has occurred e Green No clashes have occurred Reporting Clash Detection Results A Report Viewer window displays the clash detection results The window opens after the clash detection is completed For more information on the Report Viewer window see Printing and Displaying Reports on page 2 44
60. a Click Apply to create the rule 6 Click Highlight to highlight tire components associated with the attribute pressure and having a value of 60 ppi Highlighting by Attribute You can query the component tree to compare attribute and highlight components having attributes that satisfy the comparison criteria This allows you to perform the following comparisons e Test two selected attributes of the same component e Test a component attribute against an attribute of the parent of the component e Test an attribute of the subassembly of the component 4 12 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules To define a comparison between two attributes follow these steps 1 In the Highlight Rules window select the Attribute option for the test method A second attribute list is displayed in the same window Highlight Rules OP ATTRIBUTE TEST CASE VALUE IGNORE planmned cost IGNORE planned weight su AND s OR v Templates Add v Change Vy Delete Attribute By Value attribute SOURCE_NAME SOURCE_NAME SOURCE_REVISION SOURCE_REVISION A Component cost cost description description 7v Parent designer designer due date due date Vv Assembly material material planned cost planned cost planned weight planmned weight weight weight EROE EX 2 In the Operator field choose an operator The following operators are available e AND
61. a new assembly name in the Name field The new assembly will be created in the Product Structure window 6 Specify additional options 7 Click Open to apply the Open Assembly property sheet The assembly structure appears in the Product Structure window Associated and viewed CADDS models appear in the CADDS Graphics window Opening Another Assembly from CAMU Once you have activated CAMU from within EPD Connect you can close the active assembly and activate another Please note Only one assembly can be active at any given time EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Opening a New Assembly To open another assembly from CAMU 1 File or quit the active assembly using options available on the File menu 2 Open a new or existing assembly using the File menu Opening an Assembly Using the Product Structure Menu You can open an assembly quickly using the Popup menu in the Product Structure window Please note This method is available only if no assembly is active Product Structure window is empty 1 Position the cursor in the Product Structure window 2 Press and hold the right mouse button 3 Choose either Activate New Assembly or Activate Old Assembly from the pop up menu Please note See also Opening a New Assembly on page 8 18 Activating an Assembly From the CADDS LDM If you are in CAMU but no assembly is active you can activate a new or existing assembly using the CADDS Local
62. and CA_PARTATTRIBUTES must be queried If other Oracle tables are used these must have the same structure as the standard tables Select Admin gt Appl Environment to open the Application Environment window App lett ar Gre poarert FPP TART TT TESTRTET TT Ws Fanni Fails PATS m F 10r mM F PATA MIMET APATITE m F Qio s M Chage y Dekh Descrqidcal LOCAL FILE Drake Dir eCWCRETEDIR 00 s Real D ec AEMDPREFER OOO View Hane ci FILE DIRECTORY sts AH WewHome Ci FILEATTRIBUTES Aicist wes SHu e ee Fore Yer Case n UAY s Ho Ho Ho Hh sr LOUIE IHHL CHIH B 2 EPD Connect User Guide Options for System Administrators Creating Environments for Applications To create a new application environment follow these steps 1 8 Since most application parameters are similar to those of other applications it is suggested that you populate the fields on the screen with values specified for another application Select one whose characteristics are similar to the one you are creating or the application you are updating from the list In Application specify the type of application or select one from the list In Description enter a descriptive phrase for the application In Create Directory specify the path where files are to be transferred for modification This may be either the exact directory path or an environment variable setting The first character of environment variable i
63. and the prefixes see Setting Variables for TIM Parts and Assemblies on page 8 24 Updating TIM Parts and Assemblies To update TIM parts or assemblies from the root or reference assembly so that they are in sync with the original CADDS or Pro ENGINEER parts or assemblies perform one of the following actions e Choose File gt Topology Bus gt Update The Update TIM CADDS dialog box opens so that you can select the part or assembly to verify EPD Connect User Guide 8 23 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Associative Topology Bus OR e Select a TIM node in the CAMU Product Structure window and right click to choose Update TIM from the context sensitive menu After the update a report of the operation appears and the transaction is logged in the EPD Connect Audit Log The update has the following effects e If the selected node is a part it is verified and if found outdated it is updated e If the selected node is a root assembly a subassembly or a reference assembly all TIM nodes in the assembly are verified and if found outdated they are updated e The color of outdated part nodes is reset to the original color e The prefix of outdated assemblies is removed For information on how to customize the colors and the prefixes see Setting Variables for TIM Parts and Assemblies on page 8 24 setting Variables for TIM Parts and Assemblies Set the following variables in the epdconn ini file e CA TI
64. application objects Close Object Remove the explored model from the product structure window Using the left mouse buttons you can e Click components in the product structure window to select them e Press the left mouse button and drag the tree to move the tree in the window EPD Connect User Guide 2 7 Using the Product Structure Window Creating a New Product Structure Tree Creating a New Product Structure Tree Create a new product structure tree by creating its root node as follows 1 Choose File gt New The Open New Configuration dialog box opens Open New Configuration Hame RAY WINDOW Application Ps Open Reset Cancel l l 2 Enter a name in the Name field 3 Enter the type of configuration in the Application field or select one from the drop down list Standard applications are Options Description CAMU Retrieves a configuration stored in a CAMU database format PS Retrieves a configuration stored as a product structure a formatted ASCII text file describing the tree structure 4 Click Open The first root node of the tree is displayed and it is labelled with the name you have entered in the name field For more information about adding subsequent nodes to a tree hierarchy and editing or modifying existing trees refer to Chapter 3 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Please note You can create a maximu
65. attributes of a Vault item 1 Select a Vault item from the Data Browser panel whose attributes need to be edited 2 Select Database gt Vault gt Edit Attributes The Edit Vault Attributes dialog box opens SCOOTER Revision ji Application Ps HAAN 1 LHL VESPA OFF ADDR 1 PUNE Option Add change y Delete Attribute NAAM Value LML VESPA Commit __ Reset Apply Cear Cancel 3 The Name Revision and Application fields in the Edit Vault Attributes panel are filled in automatically 4 Specify whether you want to add change or delete the attributes using the Add Change or the Delete options 5 Select the required attribute from the drop down list 7 24 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 6 Specify the instance of the Vault object in the Instance field 7 The Data type field is a read only field that displays the data type of the attribute selected for the Vault object 8 Specify a value for the attribute you want to query in the Value field 9 Click Apply to edit the attributes of the Vault item Click Reset to clear the attribute list Please note You can control the behavior of the Reset button by setting a value to the variable CA_RESET_VAULT_ATTR_FROM_RULE while storing attributes If you specify the value N the attribute list is cleared when you click Reset This is the default If you specify the value Y the attributes are fetc
66. book where you can find information about them To learn more about Read this chapter Managing basic product structure functionality such as opening and working with a product structure tree Chapter 2 Using the Product Structure Window Adding changing cutting copying and pasting components in a product structure tree Chapter 3 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Controlling the display of product structure tree components Chapter 4 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Displaying and manipulating parts in the 3D Viewer Chapter 5 Using the 3D Viewer Performing clash detection and zoning on displayed parts Chapter 6 Clash Detection and Zoning Signing on to Vault setting database defaults and querying Vault data in the Data Browser window Chapter 7 Working with Vault Data Working with assembly design products in EPD Connect Chapter 8 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Working with dVise in EPD Connect Chapter 10 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Working with MEDUSA products in EPD Connect Chapter 11 Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Working with Pro ENGINEER in EPD Connect Chapter 12 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Working with CATIA products in EPD Connect Chapter 13 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA W
67. completed and the current status of all parts related to the dashboard such as the windshield He can query the properties assigned to the windshield component by a Choosing Window gt Component Status from the menu bar The Component Status window opens b Selecting the part for the windshield in the product structure tree EPD Connect User Guide 1 5 EPD Connect Overview An EPD Connect Scenario Its attributes are displayed in the Component Status window as shown in the following figure Component Status Component 10061 1 ASSEMBLY STRUCTURE DATA ITEN TYPE PS ITEM NAME 10061 ITEM REVISION PARENT NAKE 10006_1 ORIENTATION CM RAD OO 0000 GLOBAL ORTENT CH RAD 0 000 0 0 PARENT ASSY 10006 1 i Cancel 4 The designer wants to look at the graphical image of the windshield in its current form To display the windshield assembly in the Viewer Choose the Subassembly Selection icon in the toolbar a Select the required component in the Product Structure window b Open the 3DViewer by choosing Tools gt 3D Viewer e Choose Display gt Load gt Selected The tessellated model of the assembly is displayed in the viewer 5 The composite view of the windshield and steering column shows the components that the designer can query individually by selecting them in the Product Structure window The selected components are highlighted in the viewer This allows the designer
68. details on CA_STORE_ADRAWS see epdconn ini on page 8 4 While executing the Request for Review operation on CAMU assemblies EPD Connect creates file sets consisting of the assembly and the default ADRAWS These file sets are stored in the format assembly name amp DB For example if the assembly name is ABC the associated file set is stored as ABC amp DB Also these file sets are deleted after the Respond to Review operation is completed EPD Connect User Guide 8 43 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Migrating PS Files from EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Revision 8 x or Earlier Migrating PS Files from EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Revision 8 x or Earlier Files that are converted from CAMU to the PS format using EPD Connect with CADDS 5 Revision 8 x or earlier cannot be saved to CAMU using later versions of EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Use the migration utility Convert p1 located in the SEPD_HOME script directory to convert PS files in the old format to the new format that can be saved to CAMU Using this utility you can migrate these PS files or reconvert them from CAMU using later versions of EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Please note You need not use the Convert p1 utility for the following PS files e PS files generated using EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Revision 8 3 that have not been converted from CAMU e PS files created from scratch using newer versions of EPD Connect and CADDS 5 8 44 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 9 Worki
69. dialog box opens copy Application From Hane From Revision To Name To Revision Cass Public Private Project Status eres OF Reset Cancel EPD Connect User Guide 7 21 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 3 The Application the From Name and the From Revision fields are filled in automatically 4 Specify the name that you want to assign to the copied object in the To Name field 5 Specify the revision for the copied item in the To Revision field 6 Click one of the following class options Option Description Public The item has no designated owner Private The item is owned by a Vault user Project The item is owned by a defined project 7 Specify the status of the item in the Status field 8 Click OK to copy the Vault item If the item cannot be copied the Audit Transaction Log window opens with an error message 7 22 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Changing the Attributes of a Vault Item To change the attributes of a Vault item 1 Select a record from the Data Browser 2 Select Database gt Vault gt Change Attributes The Change File Attributes dialog box opens USER TYPE SYSTEM TYPE 3 Change the existing values and click OK EPD Connect User Guide 7 23 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Editing Vault Attributes To edit the
70. down list Choose the Local Disk option in the Location field Choose one of the following Directory options Options Description Create Read the part from the create directory Read Read the part from the read directory Other Specifies the full path name for a user directory CVPATH Read the part from the CVPATH Please note You can specify the CVPATH option along with the Create Read or the Other directory options In such cases if the file does not exist in the create read or the user directories the first occurrence of the file in the CVPATH is opened EPD Connect User Guide 2 9 Using the Product Structure Window Opening a Product Structure Tree e Incase of reference nodes you can specify the directory for opening the file by setting a value to the CA_SEARCH REF _DIR variable in the epdconn ini file If you specify a value 1 to the CA_SEARCH_REF_DIR variable the system searches for the reference node in the directory from which the root tree node is opened and opens it from there in case it exists If the node does not exist in that directory then the system opens the first occurrence of the file from the CVPATH directory If the value of the CA_SEARCH_REF_DIR variable is set to 0 the reference node is opened from the CVPATH 7 Click OK The product structure tree is displayed and the Open Configuration dialog box closes To keep the Open Configuration dialog box open click
71. environment variables for preprocessing and postprocessing in the user environment or the caddsrb ini file before you start the EPD Connect session The interface checks for the variables before executing the command If a variable is found the interface tries to execute it The Vault passes the names of the input and output files to the executable file The following table lists and describes the preprocessing and postprocessing variables Variable Description COMMAND_PREPROCESS When the value is the name of an executable file the interface tries to run it before executing rulebase initialization COMMAND_POSTPROCESS When the value is the name of an executable file the interface tries to run it after executing the rulebase initialization where COMMAND is store replace update get or read 8 42 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Working with EPD Connect Vault Operations on CAMU Objects The EPD interface behaves uniquely with the CAMU assemblies when executing the following Vault operations e Signout e Reset e Copy e Change Status e Request Review e Respond Review e Mark for Archive e Mark for Delete e Unmark While working on a CAMU assembly EPD Connect performs the preceding operations on all the ADRAWS associated with the assembly as well However you can change this behavior by configuring the CA_STORE_ADRAWS located in SEPD HOME data reposit epdconn ini For
72. in the Vault 2 The interface extracts the information about the reference SHEETs that are used in the stored SHEET The reference SHEETs are stored in the Vault if they are available on disk and are not available in the Vault The reference sheets are stored as separate sheets By the replace and update commands The interface extracts the information about the reference SHEETs that are used in the stored SHEET The reference SHEETs are stored in the Vault if they are available on disk and are not available in the Vault The reference sheets are stored as separate sheets By the get and read commands The interface extracts the information about the reference SHEETs used in the main SHEET If found a copy of these reference SHEETS is retrieved from the Vault The get command retrieves the reference SHEETS from the vault without signing them out MODEL By all interface commands 1 The master file for this object is defined by the prefix m and its associated dependent file is defined by the prefix s 2 The master file and its dependent file move to and from the VAULT as a single entity 3 The MODELs associated SHEET is stored in the Vault as a member of the MODEL SYMBOL By all interface commands The master file for this object is defined by the prefix y The SYMBOL does not have dependent members Please note The interface rulebase removes the local copy of each object that is successfully transferred to the Va
73. in which to save the configuration The options are as follows Option Description Create Save the part to the create directory Read Save the part to the read directory Other Enter the full path name for a user specified directory 6 Click Overwrite choose No if you do not want to overwrite the tree Please note If more than one Product Structure window with a product structure tree is open you can save the changed state of the tree configuration that is displayed in the active window using the File gt Save As option saving a Subset of the Tree To save the components of a tree 1 Select components on the displayed tree The selected components must form a hierarchy to a single root To verify that you have selected such a hierarchy choose View gt Link Selected 2 Click Nodes Selected in the Save Structure dialog box 3 Click Save to save the subtree to the local disk Please note If Vault is installed you can save the tree to the Vault after you have saved it locally To save the tree to Vault 1 Choose Database gt Vault gt Update to update the tree 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Store to store it as a new tree saving the TIM Components of a Product Structure Tree You can save the TIM assembly that is opened in EPD Connect to the local disk after making the required changes When you save a CAMU assembly or a product structure all the modified TIM reference subassemblies
74. including Application Type Data File Extension Description CATASSY model CATIA Assembly CATMODEL model CATIA Model The application type of a CATIA file is set in the Vault the first time you transfer CATIA data to the Vault using the store command When you work with the Data Browser specify the application type in the Options dialog box by changing the contents of the Application type field When you work with a product structure tree the component you select to transfer determines the application type 13 6 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Working in EPD Connect Working in EPD Connect Using EPD Connect you can execute Vault commands view the product structure of CATIA assemblies and display a CATIA assembly or model in the EPD Connect 3D Viewer or Visualizer EPD Connect Lists CATIA objects residing on the local disk or in the Vault Allows you to transfer data between the local disk and Vault Provides product structure browsing for assemblies Adds CATIA objects to product structures Working with the Information Browser To open a CATIA assembly in a product structure 1 Choose the Structure folder in the Information Browser Choose File gt Open The Open Configuration dialog box opens Specify the Application as CATASSyY The Location must be a local disk Click Query for a list of available assemblies Click Open to load the assembly To perform
75. installation Information Browser Information Browser is a tool that lets you Visualize the information in a hierarchical form irrespective of the source of information It breaks all the complex structures into hierarchies and sub hierarchies Browse information in a comprehensive form irrespective of the type of information Organize and manage data residing on your system 1 8 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components The following figure shows a typical Information Browser view cation EPD epdconnect_unix Local The Information Browser does the following e Supports common window functions like Cut Copy Paste Delete and Rename Please note The Cut Copy Delete and Rename functions are not supported for the Vault e The behavior of the commands and menus depends on the Service Provider of the data source The Information Browser just supports the skeleton and extends it to provide a concrete definition according to the requirements of the business e The Registry is the core that provides necessary information to simulate this behavior The EPD Connect Registry API is detailed in the next section See the Information Browser User Guide for details Choose the EPD Connect environment to be activated through the Information Browser The environment can work in one of the following modes e Product Structure e Assembly EPD Connect User Guide 1 9 EPD Connect
76. is applicable only for ps e RB EXTRACT ASSY DIR RB_EXTRACT CAMU The location of the directory where the extract script for CAMU application exists The default location is RB_ EXTRACT CAMU If you have customized the extract script set this to appropriate directory This should follow the directory structure same as available in EPD_HOME data appl1 CAMU RB EXTRACT ASSY_DIR setting has precedence over RB_EXTRACT setting This is applicable only for CAMU e REMOVE STORED FILES Y N Set this to Y to use the Command Line Interface If it is set to Y the rulebase removes the parts from your local area that are transferred to the Vault EPD Connect User Guide 8 5 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Connect Interface for CADDS CREATE PVS N Set this to N to use the Command Line Interface TOOLKIT TRACE OFF Set this to OFF to use the Command Line Interface CA STORE ADRAWS Y N Set this to Y to configure EPD Connect to perform certain Vault operations on all the ADRAWS associated with the CAMU assembly If it is set to N EPD Connect is configured to perform Vaulting only on the DEFAULT and the ROOT ADRAWS associated with the assembly A list of the applicable Vault operations is given in Vault Operations on CAMU Objects on page 8 43 Please note This is a site specific variable It cannot be used when executing the Vault commands through the Vault Command Line Interface CAMU EXPAND REF ENABLE Set this variabl
77. of uses for a subscription before it expires Enter up to three numbers 9 In the Notify row select the outcome that determines whether to send a message after initiating the action e Success Successful completion only e Failure Failed completion only e Both Either a successful or a failed completion e None No message 10 In the Notify User field choose the user who is to receive the notification 11 Click Apply The Add Subscription Action Attributes dialog box opens Ablilu bs Ld aww _ cw _ coat 12 Select an attribute in the upper window and then modify the Attribute name and Value in the Attribute and Value fields EPD Connect User Guide 7 39 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 13 Click Apply to make the modification 14 Click Commit when all attributes displayed are correct for this subscription 15 Click Cancel to return to the Add Object Subscription window Unsubscribing Objects To delete a subscription do the following 1 Select the subscribed object in the Data Browser window 2 Select the associated subscription that you want to delete 3 Choose Database gt Vault gt Unsubscribe The request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box 4 Select the object and click Apply Distributing Objects To distribute an object place it in the specified remote Vault and do the following 1 Select the object in the Data Browser window 2
78. plot it directly from the Product Structure tree 2 50 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Plotting a Tree Structure Choose File gt Plot gt Plot CGM The Plot dialog box opens Plotting from the File Use the File tab option to plot the tree using the CGM file File Tre ile Locatia Directory usri cenf i les CGH File aero_tree cen Plotter Nane HPGL TE Plot Details Copies Auto Scale Portrait v w Landscape Paper Size l O Reset Cancel 1 Enter the directory name that contains the CGM file 2 Specify the CGM file name for plotting the tree 3 Select the plotter name from the list of plotters that are set up using the lpsetup command 4 Specify the number of copies that you want to plot 5 Choose one of the following Auto Scale options e Yes Fits the tree within the given paper size EPD Connect User Guide 2 51 Using the Product Structure Window Plotting a Tree Structure sw Ho Paper Size lat E e No Plots the tree on the paper and truncates the portions that do not fit within the given paper 6 Specify the orientation and the paper size in the respective fields 7 Click Plot to plot the tree Plotting from the Product Structure Tree Use the Tree tab option to plot directly from the Product Structure tree Select the appropriate Tier option the plotter name the number of copies the appropriate Auto
79. satisfaction 3 Select a Response option e Approve Approve the filesets e Reject Reject the filesets Please note Approval or rejection is applied to entire filesets You cannot approve or reject individual items of a fileset separately 4 Type your comments in the Comment field 5 Click OK to send your response EPD Connect User Guide 7 33 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Working with Distributed Vaults An EPD Connect environment may be connected with Distributed Vaults more than one Vault installed in different locations You can perform the following specific operations on objects used in a Distributed Vault environment e Register Make an object accessible to users on other Vaults e Unregister Remove a Vault registration e Subscribe Associate an object with an event and a notification action e Unsubscribe Delete a subscription e Distribute Distribute an object to remote Vaults You can configure the Data Browser in the distributed Vault setup to query either the Local or the Remote Vault or both You can do this by setting a value to the variable CA_VAULTS_TO_ QUERY Assign one of the following values to this variable 1 Query Local Vault only 2 Query Remote Vault only 3 Query both Local amp Remote Any value other than 1 2 or 3 is automatically reset to 1 The setting of this environment variable is valid for a full sess
80. sets that can be associated with the object 16 In the Attribute field select from the drop down list The attributes listed belong to the attribute set specified above 17 In the Value field specify a value for the attribute you want to query 18 When all necessary fields have been filled in select Refresh in the Data Browser window to display the requested list of files EPD Connect User Guide 7 45 Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault Customizing Query Results When you search for information in the Data Browser you can specify the information you want displayed in the Data Browser as follows 1 Choose Window gt Heading Customizer The Heading Customizer dialog box opens Heading Customizer a Label NAME E Width 40 Order Description NAME Apply Load Defaults Pinned yes a No fi Edit Default YES Ho Cancel l 2 The Label field is a list of all the columns available Click this icon to see the list of columns available The columns available are Column Name Description NAME Name of the file REVISION Revision STATUS Status Code SYSCODE System Code OWNER Owner of the file TYPE Type of Application USERID User ID NODE NAME Node Name SOURCE _VAULT Vault from which it was stored CLASS Group Technology Code SYSTEM TYPE System Type
81. the options that are explained above EPD Connect User Guide 2 3 Using the Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window i o Product Structure Window Toolbar The toolbar located at the bottom of the window contains buttons It allows you to open dialog boxes and command windows while working with a product structure tree The buttons and their respective functions are as follows Displays the Structure Overview window It provides a visual overview of the entire hierarchical structure of the product You can also display this window by choosing Window gt Structure Overview Opens the Vault Data Browser It is a comprehensive facility for searching and listing information about data stored either locally or in the Vault Displays the component status about a selected component or set of components displayed sequentially in browse mode For more information on displaying one component or a set of components refer to Component Status on page 2 35 Displays the Memory dialog box which allows you to save displayed trees locally in temporary memory and perform various actions such as compare operations For more information refer to Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation on page 2 23 Displays the Configuration Compare Rules dialog box It allows you to compare one tree with another according to a set of comparison rules For more information refer to Comparing Two Trees on page 2 25
82. to start detailed work on the dashboard 1 6 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview An EPD Connect Scenario 6 A component is often modified during the dashboard design process To change the design the designer needs write access to the geometry of this component To have write access a Select the component s node from the product structure tree in the Product Structure window b Choose Database gt Vault gt Signout from the menu bar The designer needs Read access to refer to the geometry of adjacent components To have read access a Select the part in the Product Structure window b Choose Database gt Vault gt Read Specific Rev from the menu bar The designer views the components with their dimensions and constraints in the CAD product used for part design in this case CADDS To launch CADDS and open the part a Choose Tools gt CADDS CAMU b Choose the Assembly tab in the Information Browser ce Choose File gt Activate Assembly d Identify the name of the assembly e Select the component node from the product structure tree f Choose Open Model in the dialog box 9 The designer begins work on the dashboard Advantages of EPD Connect The advantages of an EPD Connect environment are It optimizes collaboration and communication among members of a team Thus pertinent information is routed and accessible to all persons involved in a project regardless of their lo
83. toolbar at the bottom of the Product Structure window click the icon 2 Choose File gt Properties The Item Properties dialog box opens For more information of this dialog box refer to Using the Product Structure Window on page 2 3 Generating Reports You can generate reports about STEP files displayed in the Product Structure Window as you would generate reports about any product structure file For more information on reports refer to Printing and Displaying Reports on page 2 44 For a status report on any selected component or set of components of a STEP file 1 With its product structure active select the component 2 Choose Window gt Component Status The Component Status Report dialog box opens For more information refer to Component Status on page 2 35 Working with STEP Data in the Vault You can query STEP data stored in the Vault and transfer it between your local disk and the Vault STEP files are stored as application type STEP in the Vault For details about querying and transferring Vault data refer to Chapter 7 Working with Vault Data 14 12 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Limitations Limitations To use the EPD interface for STEP AP203 with EPD Connect locally you must disable the existing Vault support If you want EPD Connect to list and recognize the application interface types but have not disabled Vault support then the f
84. your chosen DIVISION MockUp installation directory to the DIVISIONROOT environment variable You may also choose to remove some or all of the CV DORS environment settings Please note Any text prefixed by a character is a comment and is not interpreted The dvise_epd_ rc file is located in the etc epd userenv subdirectory of the DIVSION MockUp installation directory 10 6 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Setting the User Environment Customizing the EPD Connect Tools Menu The following extract from the dvise_epd_rc file configures EPD Connect to use the tools m menu file that is distributed as part of the DIVISION MockUp installation Modified tools menu setenv EPD TOOLS MENU SDIVISIONROOT system epd menus tools m The Tools menu includes a 3D Viewer option The 3D Viewer option has two options e Set 3D Viewer Selects a 3D visualization tool e Start 3D Viewer Starts the selected 3D visualization tool The Set 3D Viewer option displays the Set 3D Viewer dialog box Select a 3D Viewer from the available options that is dVISE EPD3dviewer Visualizer and any others that are installed on your system Other Integration Files The following scripts facilitate communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp e The dvnew cf script is invoked from within the modified ca_new r resource file and is used to invoke the CA_TREE_TRIGGER dvopen p1 script with an
85. 1ag equal to 9 is not mirrored when mirroring its parent Only the position of the component is mirrored 1 24 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview Symmetry in EPD Connect Limitations and Restrictions The following are the limitations and restrictions Child Reference Assemblies are not supported while mirroring a subassembly instance TRANSPVS applies the symmetry to the vertices of a GPATH but does not transform the three angles defining referential orientations TRANSPVS changes the orientation of the facets if a symmetry is activated Visualizer is used with the Back Facing Polygons option set to Display instead of Remove in the Render Controls dialog box The PS to DB converter generates error messages when converting a PS structure with symmetrical components into a DB file in a revision unable to support symmetry SYMMETRY FLAG Attribute The attribute SYMMETRY FLAG indicates if a symmetry is applied or can be applied to a component SYMMETRY FLAG Sym_flag Sym_flag indicates the preferred symmetry plane and if the symmetry is active or not Symmetry Flag Value Mirror Plane 0 Symmetry plane not chosen 1 X 2 Y 1 YZ 2 XZ 9 The mirrored component does not exist EPD Connect User Guide 1 25 EPD Connect Overview Symmetry in EPD Connect There is no way to indicate that a component should be mirrored Local and global positions of a component ar
86. 37 Sending for review B 11 Alphanumeric B 12 ANSPATH B 9 AP 203 STEP interface 14 1 Application Objects 15 1 Application Defaults 7 6 Applications AEC 15 1 Defining 2 55 launching 2 55 Ascending Sort 3 15 Assembly attributes Defining 2 21 Assembly mode Symmetry commands 8 21 TIM Components 8 22 EPD Connect User Guide Index 1 Index Using Associative Topology Bus 8 22 Associative Topology Bus 8 22 Assembly mode 8 22 Attachment Window 2 37 Attributes Changing 7 23 edit global 3 16 Editing 7 24 Editing component 2 19 Mandatory 7 25 Audit Log 2 38 AutoCAD 1 11 1 14 B Back facing polygons in 3D Viewer 5 11 Browse product structure tree 4 26 Browser View menu 2 36 C CAD products supported 1 14 CADDS Converting files for display 5 20 Converting parts to graphic files 5 20 Exporting parts and assemblies 8 22 Camera 3D Viewer 5 7 CAMU Interface to 1 14 CAMU file Opening using the CVPATH 8 13 Case sensitivity System attributes B 5 CATIA interface 1 14 Vault query 13 6 Vault transfer 13 6 CGM file 2 49 Plotting 2 51 Change Password Database menu 7 14 Changing attributes 7 23 Changing revision of Vault file 7 26 Changing status of Vault files 7 25 Clash detection 6 2 Reporting results 6 6 Viewing results 6 5 Clear menu 4 31 Multiple product structure trees 4 31 Clear View menu 2 18 Clipboard 2 38 Copying components 3 11 Close Multiple product structure trees 15 6 Product structur
87. 8 13 Components 2 17 Components closing 2 17 Components refreshing 2 16 Nodes 2 10 Tree components expanding 2 16 Refresh DOD 7 14 Expanded reference tree components 2 16 Registering objects 7 34 Rendering 3D Viewer 5 10 Reorder Components 3 13 Replace Vault items 7 17 Report Comparison 2 28 Displaying in Product Structure window 2 44 Printing 2 29 Scroll 4 3 Report Viewer window 2 45 Reports Custom 5 17 Request for review Multiple Vault items 7 28 Single Vault item 7 27 Reset button 7 25 Respond to review Multiple Vault items 7 32 Single Vault item 7 30 Restore state 4 21 Multiple product structure trees 4 21 Revision changing for Vault file 7 26 Revisions unsetting 3 18 Index 6 EPD Connect User Guide Index Rulebases Defining 2 55 Rules access 4 7 S Save Multiple product structure trees 2 31 Product structure tree 2 30 Query results 7 48 Save As 2 30 Save state 4 20 Multiple product structure trees 4 20 Scroll Report 4 3 Scrolling Product structure tree 2 3 Search Vault for component use 7 10 Select Attribute 3 16 Display menu 5 21 Value 3 16 Select View menu 4 30 Selecting Access indicator rule 4 9 Send Message 7 13 Session Properties dialog 2 4 Setting revisions 3 18 Setting view 3D Viewer 5 6 Sheets 11 6 Show Display menu 5 21 Signoff database 7 5 Signon database 7 5 Single A 1 DB A 3 Product structure window 2 2 Tree A 1 Single Vault item Requesting for review 7 27 Res
88. ADJ GEAR ADI VORH ADJ ARH SINE PLATE 51H ADI RIVET ADD ALYET ADT RIVET ADJ SIDE PLATE AQT SHAFT Using the Report Viewer window you can select deselect highlight make transparent reset hide show clear and load components in the Product Structure window or the EPD Visualizer window as follows 1 Select one or more parts displayed in the Report Viewer 2 In the Options panel select Structure Window or Visualizer Please note You can also select both the above options 3 Choose one of the following Selected The command affects the selected part Parts already changed retain their changed state EPD Connect User Guide 2 45 Using the Product Structure Window Printing and Displaying Reports e Only Selected The command affects only the selected part Parts already changed are reset to their original state e All The command affects all parts irrespective of the part selected 4 Using the right mouse button select one of the following options Report Viewer Option Description Select Selects components Deselect Clears selections Highlight Highlights components Transparent Makes transparent components in the EPD Visualizer window For information on the Transparent option in EPD Visualizer see the EPD Visualizer User Guide This option does not affect the Product Structure window Reset Resets components to their original state Hid
89. AMU from outside of EPD Connect only the CAMU specific attribute tools are available It is strongly recommended that you use the EPD Connect attribute tools and ignore those available within standalone CAMU There is no migration path for CAMU specific attributes to EPD Connect In addition the EPD Connect attribute tools are far superior to those available in stand alone CAMU To create or revise attributes 1 Select the desired component from within the Product Structure Window 2 Select Edit gt Edit Attributes from the menu bar symmetry CAMU stores the same type of information in db file as EPD Connect in ps file format The interaction between CAMU and EPD Connect is done by OpenNavigator commands 8 20 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Working on an Assembly The procedure followed to store symmetry in CAMU and PS are different So symmetry in CAMU should be converted to X mirror or Y mirror and an additional rotation should be applied When a conversion occurs from DB to PS or from _PS to _DB the seven attributes values for orientation data will be saved Conversion from db to ps does not lose any Symmetry information Symmetry commands are supported in Assembly mode Please note Error messages will be generated when converting a _PS with symmetrical components into a _DB file in a version not supporting symmetry EPD Connect User Guide 8 21 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Associativ
90. AWSs separately from EPD Connect so that you can set the required attributes in the attribute panel in EPD Connect GET Command When you execute a get command on a CADDS object the interface 1 Retrieves the object from the Vault and places in the directory in case a fully qualified path is supplied Retrieves the object from the Vault and places in the directory specified by the variable CVCREATEDIR if the object is a CADDS Part If this variable is not defined then the object is placed in the current directory Retrieves the object from the Vault and places in the directory specified by the variable CA_ASSYPREFIX if the object is a CAMU Assembly or Product structure If this variable is not defined then the object is placed in the current directory READ Command When you execute a read command on a CADDS object the interface 1 Retrieves the object from the Vault and places it in the directory if a fully qualified path is supplied Retrieves the object from the Vault and places in the directory specified by the variable CA_READPREFIX if the object is a CADDS Part If this variable is not defined then the object is placed in the current directory Retrieves the object from the Vault and places in the directory specified by the variable CA_READPREFIX if the object is a CAMU assembly or product structure If this variable is not defined then the object is placed in the current directory 8 38
91. Apply Please note You can open a maximum of four Product Structure windows using the Open Configuration dialog box By default a new Product Structure window opens when you load a product structure tree Displaying Subtree Components In the Open Configuration dialog box the Expand References buttons allow you to specify the number of levels of reference nodes to display in the tree Reducing the number of levels saves retrieval and display time The options follow Options Description All Opens the tree with all reference components fully expanded Level Opens the tree with reference components expanded to the number of levels you specify The default level is 1 Retrieving Associated Attributes The Query Attribute Data command specifies whether to retrieve associated attributes on each node when you open a tree When clicked all attributes associated with nodes on the tree are retrieved The Query Attribute Data options are as follows Options Description Local Retrieves attribute data from the local disk These are attributes provided through the file system such as file date and time Database Retrieves attribute data from the database EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Opening a Product Structure Tree To retrieve a tree without attributes clear both the Local and Database options before you open the tree To query the local and da
92. Camera Position and Target 5 7 Measuring Distance 5 8 Measuring Distance from Camera to Point 5 8 Measuring Distance Between Two Points 5 8 Rendering 5 10 Rendering Methods 5 10 Back Facing Polygons 5 11 Display Buffering 5 11 Moving the Camera 5 12 Moving the Camera in an Angular Direction 5 12 Moving the Camera in a Linear Direction 5 13 Setting the Working Units 5 15 Selecting and Scrolling 5 17 Running Custom Reports 5 17 Selecting Application Objects 5 18 Disolay Menu 5 19 Loading Tree Components into the 3D Viewer Load ___ 5 20 Deleting Components from the 3D Viewer Delete 5 20 Converting CADDS Parts to Graphic Files Convert _ lt 5 20 Showing Components Show 5 21 Hiding Components Hide 5 21 Selecting Components Select 5 21 Incrementally Selecting Components in the 3D Viewer _____ 5 22 Selecting Components in the 3D Viewer 5 22 Deselecting Components Deselect 5 23 EPD Connect User Guide Contents xi Incrementally Deselecting Components in the 3D Viewer ___ Highlighting Components Highlight Highlighting the Selected Components Highlighting the Components Incrementally Highlighting Only Selected Components Highlighting Only Highlighted Components Applying Transparency Transparency Resetting Colors Color Displaying Polygons Options Using the Display Options Examples Displaying Selected Components Displaying Highlighted Components Hid
93. DATA BROWSER RESULTS dialog box opens SAVE DATA BROWSER RESULTS Delimiter Tab Space Other 2 In the Results File field specify a name for the file 3 In the Delimiter field select a delimiter for the columns You have the following options e Tab A tab space between columns e Space A single space between columns e Others A character you specify This is the default with the carat as the delimiter 4 In the Overwrite field choose one of the following options e Yes Overwrites a file that has the same name that you specified in the preceding step e No Does not overwrite a file that has the same name 5 Click Save Opening a Tree Structure from the Vault To retrieve product structure data from the Vault you must first signon to it see Vault Signon and Signoff Procedures on page 7 5 Permission to access a tree depends on the database access privileges set by your system administrator In 7 48 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault addition EPD Connect must be configured to store structures in the database in a form that can be queried To open a tree structure from the Vault follow these steps 1 Query the Vault from the Data Browser window as described in Querying Vault Data on page 7 43 The results of the query you specified are displayed in the Data Browser Data Browser Local Vault
94. DRAWS are unregistered whenever the CAMU file is unregistered Please note While unregistering a CAMU file even if the unregistration of one associated ADRAW fails then the CAMU file and all associated ADRAWs remain registered at the same level at which they were registered earlier 7 36 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options If you set the value of the variable CA_ADD ADRAWS IN_CAMU to 0 the ADRAWS associated with the CAMU files are not registered or unregistered when you register or unregister CAMU files subscribing Objects To subscribe an object specify that if a certain event for example a change in revision level format or status occurs to that object it will trigger one of the following actions e A message will inform a user or a list of users that the event occurred on a selected file or part e An export action will be invoked to export a read only replica of a file to a list of Vaults e An export action will be invoked to refresh update the original of a previously write replicated file EPD Connect User Guide 7 37 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options To subscribe an object 1 Select the object in the Data Browser window 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Subscribe The Add Object Subscription dialog box opens fod te set s heerlst or ticcn Ihemi Minm Applusiiiin aniust ASSY PS Kawai r CIAHGC_ODJCCT_DIHAR
95. EPD Connect User Guide Optegra Release 7 DOC40159 013 Parametric Technology Corporation Copyright 2002 Parametric Technology Corporation All Rights Reserved User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying disclosure and use of such documentation PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media but only for internal personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC This documentation may not be disclosed transferred modified or reduced to any form including electronic media or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes Information described herein is furnished for general information only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement contains valuable trade secret
96. For example On the UNIX platform specify lpr P lt printer name gt lpr is the default print command that can be changed by assigning values to the variable CA_PRINT_COMMAND in the epdconn ini file On the Windows NT platform in the Print Command field specify print D lt printer name gt print D is the default print command that can be changed by assigning values to the variable CA_PRINT_WIN_COMMAND in the epdconn inii file 4 Click appropriate option for Paper Size and Orientation for the print job 5 Set the Scale EPD Connect User Guide 2 47 Using the Product Structure Window Printing Product Structures You can reduce the size of the printed product structure tree by entering a digit from 1 to 9 The number entered will represent the denominator of a fraction with an assumed 1 for the numerator For example If you enter 2 the tree will be printed at half 1 2 of its default size 1 If you enter 3 then the scale will be one third 1 3 of the default size 6 Click appropriate Tier option for printing the levels of the tree A tier is a single vertical level in the product structure tree e All To print the entire product structure of a tree e Tiers To specify the tiers fill in the From and To fields in the dialog box that is displayed 7 Click Print to execute the print job Please note A compressed product structure is printed in compressed mode 2 48 EPD Connect User Guide
97. IG to its default location EPD_HOME data reposit epdconn ini If you have a customized version of this file set CVEPD_MAIN_CONFIG accordingly caddsrb ini The environment variable CADDSRB_REPOSIT specifies the location of the caddsrb ini In the epdconn ini this is set to its default location EPD_HOME data reposit caddsrb ini If you have a customized version of this file set CADDSRB_REPOSIT accordingly Please note If you are using the Vault Command Line Interface along with the EPD Connect Interfaces for vaulting various application objects the environment variable LIBPATH should contains EPD_HOME lib directory This is applicable for IBM AIX platform only epdconmn ini The following settings in the epdconn ini are used by the EPD Interface to CADDS DO REVISION LINKING Y N Set this to N to use the Command Line Interface If it is set to Y the rulebase creates the links for the parts created in the local area when you do a GET READ from the Vault If you do a GET for a CADDS part called test with revision 1 you get a copy of the part test in your local area and a link is created from test 1 to test For the READ SPECIFIC REV command a revision link is created only if the object is at the latest revision For example if a CADDS part called test exists in Vault at Revision and Revision 2 you get the following results if you run the READ SPECIFIC REV command EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Conn
98. Installation Utility x kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk Enter the user id of your Vault Administration account name OK to add CATIA Application Environment to Optegra Vault yes Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm Checking New Tables in ORACLE Database New tables already exist Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm Adding CATIA Application to Optegra Vault OK to install the CATIA Vault Attributes yes Enter the EDMADMIN user password edmadmin Signing on to the Vault as edmadmin CDMSONO00I Optegra CDMSON0O16I Sign on to EDM server ADBHUT completed successfully You have 0 EDM message s Adding CATIA attributes CAMARL100I CONFIG RULE CATASSY has been added CAMARL100I CONFIG OPT RULE CATASSY has been added CDMSOF017I Sign off from EDM completed successfully CATIA attributes added Optegra Interface for CATIA Installation Complete EPD Connect User Guide 13 5 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Working with CATIA Data in the Vault Querying Vault for CATIA Data You can query Vault for CATIA data and transfer it between the local disk and the Vault CATIA data is transferred based on its application type The EPD Connect Interface for CATIA and the Vault support two types of CATIA application
99. M NODE COLOR Use this variable to define the color of TIM nodes in the Product Structure window The default is 15 red You can change the color by referring to the palettes in the SEPD_HOME data palettes directory e CA_TIM NODE OUTOFDATE Use this variable to define the color of TIM nodes in the Product Structure window that were verified and found outdated The default is 4 green e CA TIM ASSY_ PREFIX Use this variable to define the letter that prefixes TIM assemblies in the Product Structure window The default is T e CA TIM ASSY PREFIX OUTOFDATE Use this variable to define the letter that prefixes TIM assemblies in the Product Structure window that were verified and found outdated The default is Q 8 24 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Exiting CAMU and EPD Connect Exiting CAMU and EPD Connect To exit CAMU and EPD Connect 1 Set an appropriate value to the variable EPDEXIT_CADDSEXIT in the epdconn ini file see EPDEXIT_CADDSEXIT on page 8 7 for details 2 Close any active assembly Please note Any active assembly must be closed before you attempt to exit CAMU 3 Exit the CAMU application by positioning the cursor in the Product Structure window and selecting Exit from the popup menu 4 Exit EPD Connect by choosing File gt Exit EPD Connect User Guide 8 25 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab Using the Information Browser As
100. ME data reposit C launch ini EPD Connect User Guide 2 57 Using the Product Structure Window Launching Applications from Product Structure Components In the Windows environment the file is located in Install Drive EPD_HOME data reposit C launch ini Each application or rulebase in the launch ini file includes a section that is headed by the application name in brackets Specify the view and mod paths as shown in the following example FILE view usr openwin bin textedit mod usr openwin bin textedit LOCAL view usr openwin bin textedit mod usr openwin bin textedit WORD view home machinename path_to word executable mod home machinename path_to_word_executable 1 Editing the cvepd ini File Edit the cvepd ini file by adding a Vault variable to the file for every new application defined For example if you are defining WORD as an application add the following line to the cvepd ini file EDM WORD lt name of rulebase executable or dll file gt Please note The name used for the application must be the same both in the header of the lines added to the launch ini file as shown in the preceding section and in the segment of the EDM_xxxx statement 2 58 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 3 Creating and Editing a Product structure Tree This chapter explains how to add change cut copy and paste components in a product structure tree The Edit Menu Adding Components Editing the Tree
101. Navigator command language Used to interact with EPD Connect and to create or modify a product structure EPD Connect User Guide 1 23 EPD Connect Overview Symmetry in EPD Connect e Clash Detection Clash detection between components based on computed tessellation data e Zoning Detection of components belonging to a predefined geographic zone based on clash detection e Store Get Read from to Vault File manipulations between EPD Connect and Vault Features The features of symmetry are e The information of the symmetry is shared by local and global positioning e Symmetry is performed before rotation and translation This is to be consistent with independent mirroring as developed in CADDS CAMU where rotation and translation is applied on a symmetrical component The geometrical transformations are applied in the following order a Current syntax Rotation around X Rotation around Y Rotation around Z Translation to X_coord Y_coord Z_coord b New syntax Symmetry against plane of symmetry X or Y mirroring Rotation around X Rotation around Y Rotation around Z Translation to X_coord Y_coord Z_coord Current syntax is equivalent to new syntax when Sym flag isOor9 When reading a product structure components without any SYMMETRY FLAG defined will receive a Sym_flag equal to 0 This value allows you to apply a symmetry to the component if CA_USE_SYMMETRY authorizes it A component having a Sym_f
102. P file is created that contains product structure attributes and the geometry of highlighted components EPD Connect User Guide 14 7 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Creating STEP Output This option may save time if the structure s geometry is complex and you want to convert only certain nodes You cannot save multiple independent components or subassemblies to one STEP file The following methods are useful when you save a product structure e Add the corresponding trace links by choosing View gt Link gt Selected to automatically select the required trace links e Copy the chosen components to a new structure and save it as a STEP file Converting STEP Files to and from CADDS If the EPD Connect CADDS translator is installed you can convert STEP files to and from CADDS files Please note The CADDS STEP translator is sold and installed separately Converting STEP Files to CADDS Files To convert a STEP file to a CADDS file with the STEP file s product structure active 1 Choose File gt Export The Export Structure dialog box opens 2 In the Name field enter the name of the exported file l nT ALE TU Lyan IL LM Mm a Co wo Mead bur i Aa Laona Ap ker ae Du Haire ne Set iri phin s ELLY ae MI ADDR dah et ANPA Cinna obs ee Tg hd ree mi 1y 3 In the Export to field choose CADDS 4 For Directory click Create and enter the name of the directory 5 For Ove
103. PD Connect is used only for viewing the product structure of the Pro ENGINEER assembly Working with the Data Browser To work with the Data Browser 1 2 3 Choose Window gt Data Browser Choose the Vault folder to list objects located in the Vault database or choose the Local folder to list objects located on the local disk Click Options The Query Options dialog box opens EPD Connect User Guide 12 9 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Working in EPD Connect 4 Choose Application to select a Pro ENGINEER object PTCASM PTCPRT PTCDRW PTCFRM or PTCLAY 5 Click OK or Apply 6 Select an object from the list and choose a Vault operation from Database gt Vault 12 10 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 13 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA The EPD Interface for CATIA allows you to work on CATIA generated objects within EPD Connect This chapter discusses the following topics e Overview e Features e Limitations e Working with CATIA Data in the Vault e Working in EPD Connect Please note CATIA functions are not available in the Windows environment EPD Connect User Guide 13 1 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Overview Overview The EPD Interface for CATIA allows you to e Perform Vault operations on CATIA model files e View the product structure of CATIA assemblies in EPD Connect e Display the CATIA model in the EPD Connect 3D Viewer or Visualizer Please note
104. PD Connect specific CAMU actions The toolbar icons are as follows Exit the Application Closes EPD Connect and all applications launched from within the active EPD Connect session It also quits active and suspended files Quit and Exit CAMU Assembly Exits the assembly without filing See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on quitting the active and suspended models Adrawings and assemblies File CAMU Assembly Files the assembly while keeping it active See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on filing the active assembly CAMU View Component Opens the View Component property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on viewing components CAMU Activate Model Opens the Activate Model property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on activating the model associated to the selected component class 8 30 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab CAMU Verify Object Opens the Verify Object property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for detail on querying the selected component or viewing the orientations for a reference node p CAMU Move Component Opens the Move Component property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on moving associated models within the active assembly Fy CAMU Lock Component Opens th
105. PD Interface for STEP AP203 reads and writes these formats The remainder of this chapter refers to files coded in both formats as STEP files 14 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Features Features The EPD Interface for STEP AP203 allows you to Display STEP folders and files Open product structures that originate as STEP files View a STEP file s geometry Work with STEP product structures Create STEP output Convert STEP files to and from CADDS format Perform EPD Connect actions on STEP files Work with STEP data in the Vault Please note Product structures opened in the EPD Connect browser for STEP assemblies are intended for viewing purposes only Do not attempt to modify displayed structures by adding or deleting nodes The File gt Save function for STEP assemblies is not supported by the EPD Connect interface If you execute a File gt Save command no data will be written to disk The following error message will be displayed Successfully saved 1 of 1 The following sections discuss the features of the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 For additional information regarding Process flow refer to Appendix C Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Working with product structure see e Chapter 2 Using the Product Structure Window e Chapter 3 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree e Chapter 4 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window
106. Parametric Technology Corporation 140 Kendrick Street Needham MA 02494 USA Table of Contents Preface Related Documents xxi Book Conventions xxii Online User Documentation xxiii Printing Documentation xxiii Resources and Services XXiV Documentation Comments XXiV EPD Connect Overview About EPD Connect 1 2 An EPD Connect Scenario 1 3 Advantages of EPD Connect 1 7 EPD Connect Components 1 8 Basic Components 1 8 Information Browser 1 8 Product Structure Window 1 10 Data Browser 1 12 3 Dimensional Viewer 1 12 Optional Components 1 13 Database 1 14 Dynamic Application Interfaces 1 14 EPD Visualizer 1 15 MockUp 1 15 Web Browser 1 16 EPD Connect User Guide Contents v 1 17 EPD Connect Support for Topology Bus Limitations and Restrictions 1 18 Accessing and Exiting EPD Connect 1 19 Exiting EPD Connect 1 19 Displaying EPD Connect on Sun Solaris from HP UX 1 20 Customizing EPD Connect 1 21 Customizing with Perl 1 21 Symmetry in EPD Connect 1 22 Symmetry 1 22 Mirroring 1 22 Components Modified During Mirroring 1 23 Features 1 24 Limitations and Restrictions 1 25 SYMMETRY FLAG Attribute 1 25 Navigator License Considerations in EPD Connect 1 27 Restrictions 1 27 Where to Look for Information 1 28 Using the Product Structure Window Product Structure Window 2 2 Using the Product S
107. Parts You can quit without filing all parts such as CADDS models and Adrawings activated during the current EPD Connect session by choosing File gt Quit Suspended Parts For information on how this applies to CADDS CAMU see Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Quitting and Exiting the Active Assembly You can quit without filing the active assembly and all parts such as CADDS models and Adrawings activated during the current EPD Connect session by choosing File gt Quit and Exit Assembly For information on how this applies to CADDS CAMU see Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Entering the CADDS Local Data Manager You can display the CADDS Local Data Manager by selecting File gt Enter LDM For information on how this applies to CADDS CAMU see Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Closing the Current EPD Connect Session You can exit EPD Connect by selecting File gt Exit This quits the active assembly file and all suspended parts without filing 8 28 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab Edit Menu When you select the Assembly tab from the Information Browser the contents of the Edit menu change The options are as follows Please note To edit an existing component within the Product Structure tree you must first lock that component Option Description Add Component
108. Prints the tree structure on a PostScript printer For more information refer to Printing Product Structures on page 2 47 Opens the Item Properties dialog box You can also display this dialog box by choosing File gt Properties It includes the following tabs General Edits component attributes For more information refer to Editing Component Attributes on page 2 19 Assembly Modifies attributes of the components or nodes of the Product Structure loaded in EPD Connect Displays the Session Properties window For more information refer to Session Summary on page 2 33 2 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window Please note activated when you click an icon on the toolbar The associated action is immediately executed If more than one Product Structure window is open a window is EPD Connect Toolbar for the Product Structure Window The EPD Connect menu bar includes a toolbar whose icons change according to the folder chosen in the Information Browser The toolbar icons and their respective functions are as follows PRBEEBEEAEBRCE t a h h E Exits the EPD Connect application Creates a new product structure tree Opens an old product structure tree Closes the current product structure tree Saves the current product structure tree Cuts selected components to the clipboard Copies selected components to the
109. Pro CASTING Pro CDT Pro CMM Pro COLLABORATE Pro COMPOSITE Pro CONCEPT Pro CONVERT Pro DATA for PDGS Pro DESIGNER Pro DETAIL Pro DIAGRAM Pro DIEFACE Pro DRAW Pro ECAD Pro ENGINE Pro FEATURE Pro FEM POST Pro FICIENCY Pro FLY THROUGH Pro HARNESS Pro INTERFACE Pro LANGUAGE Pro LEGACY Pro LIBRARYACCESS Pro MESH Pro Model View Pro MOLDESIGN Pro NC ADVANCED Pro NC CHECK Pro NC MILL Pro NCPOST Pro NC SHEETMETAL Pro NC TURN Pro NC WEDM Pro NC Wire EDM Pro NETWORK ANIMATOR Pro NOTEBOOK Pro PDM Pro PHOTORENDER Pro PIPING Pro PLASTIC ADVISOR Pro PLOT Pro POWER DESIGN Pro PROCESS Pro REPORT Pro REVIEW Pro SCAN TOOLS Pro SHEETMETAL Pro SURFACE Pro VERIFY Pro Web Link Pro Web Publish Pro WELDING Product Development Means Business Product First Products First ProductView PTC Precision Shrinkwrap The Product Development Company The Way to Product First Wildfire Windchill DynamicDesignLink Windchill PartsLink Windchill PDMLink Windchill ProjectLink and Windchill SupplyLink Third Party Trademarks Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Advanced ClusterProven ClusterProven and the ClusterProven design are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries and are used under license IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product AIX is a registered trademark of IBM Corporati
110. R Please note e Attribute _Name is the name of the attribute e Value_1 Value_2 are the values for that attribute You can have as many values as you require e Each attribute that you define must begin with STARTATTR and end with ENDATTR e lt TAB gt indicates that the comments are separated from the attribute name or value by a Tab To display these attributes and values in the list of the Attribute and Value fields of the Item Properties and Global Attribute Edit dialog boxes specify the attribute file name for the USER_ASSY_ATTR_FILE environment variable in epdconn ini EPD Connect User Guide 2 21 Using the Product Structure Window Editing Component Attributes The attributes and the values are displayed in the Attribute and Value fields of the following dialog boxes e The Item Properties dialog box on clicking the Assembly tab m perties Component worm 1 a General Assembly Attachments ATTRIBUTE cost 8 description Class worm wheel 1239 7h designer Class john doe due date Class 01 01 97 material Class copper plamed cost Class 9 50 plamed weight Class 75 weight Class 50 7 d Attribute BO E Value Be Bi Type instance w dass Group 2s El Access MODIFY Saved YES EO OO Add Change Delete OK Refresh Cancel l e The Global Attribute Edit dialog box For more information refer to Setting Global Attributes on page 3
111. REFIX setenv CVCREATEDIR setenv CVPATH 10 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Setting the User Environment DIVISIONPATH must point to the same places as parts referenced by CVPATH setenv DIVISIONPATH Qecho SCVPATH sed s C g sed s g Q Run Connect EPD_HOME scripts Connect amp The Go executable is a simple C shell script To run this script you must first change directory to the etc epd userenv subdirectory of the DIVISION MockUp installation The GO script performs the following functions e Reads the dvise _epd_ rc file from the DIVISION MockUp installation directory This sets a number of EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp environment variables e Sets your own data specific environment variables if any e Sets the DIVISIONPATH environment variable that points DIVISION MockUp to its data files e Starts EPD Connect you may need to edit the path Setting the DIVISIONPATH Environment Variable The DIVISIONPATH environment variable is used by DIVISION MockUp to locate its data files You can set this variable to a list of colon separated paths on UNIX or semi colon separated paths on Windows For example on UNIX jsmith parts rjones parts wrogers parts Data files that are used by DIVISION MockUp are automatically generated when you view a configuration The location of these files depends on the load method that you choose
112. S objects are stored in the Vault CADDS Object Stored in Vault as CADDS Part PART with env CADDS CAMU Assemblies FILE with env CADDS Product Structures FILE with env CADDS ADRAW PART with env gt ADRAW The EPD Interface for CADDS does not support the CATALOG object with the Vault transfer commands The EPD Connect interface for the CADDS Vault File Transfer commands supports the following e The lt local file name gt only in the CGOS format e The lt selection name gt same as before in CGOS format e The lt local directory name gt in the Operating System level format For example e If you want to store a CAMU assembly named camuassy use the following command cistore env cadds selscope f selname CAMUASSY amp DB 1lfname HOME PARTS CAMUASSY amp DB e If you want to get the above assembly use the following command ciget selscope selname CAMUASSY amp DB ldirname home parts OR ciget selscope f selname CAMUASSY amp DB lfname HOME PARTS CAMUASSY amp DB To add a text file from a directory in the local area toa CADDS part or a file available in Vault use the following command cistore env cadds lfname myparts dir abc txt selscope selname cdpart abc txt pfname cdpart After you have installed the latest Optegra Vault with Distributed Vault and Distributed Object Directory run the navinstall1 script EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Inter
113. SA EPD Connect User Guide 5 5 Using the 3D Viewer Setting the View setting the View a You can control the view of the 3D scene You can e Reset the primary view e Set a new primary view e Set the view so that you see all components in the scene e Zoom into an area of the scene to have a close up view Resetting the Primary View The primary view is the initial view displayed when you add your first graphics file It is a fixed view and you can return to it as you manipulate the 3D scene Click the icon to reset the current view of the 3D scene to the primary view setting a New Primary View To set a new primary view display the scene that you want as your primary view Then click the icon for setting the primary view Viewing All Components To view all the components in the scene click this icon The components are centered and placed within the limits of the graphics window Zooming You can define a rectangular area to be a close up view of the 3D scene This allows you to enlarge an area to work on it To zoom a selected area 1 Click the zooming icon 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window 3 Digitize two boundary points 5 6 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Setting the Camera setting the Camera The camera lens encompasses all that you see in the 3D scene The camera position is your eye point The camera target point is located at the center of the 3D Vi
114. SAGE User EDMADMIN Message Please review the content Apply Reset Cancel 2 Specify the recipients of your message using one of the following methods e Click User and type the user s name or choose the name from the drop down list e Click List and type the name of a previously created list or choose one from the drop down list 3 Type your message in the message box You can type any message up to 240 characters 4 Click Apply to send the message to the designated users 7 12 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Reading Messages When you read messages you respond to them by voting your approval or disapproval of a request for a review or a release 1 Choose Database gt Read Messages to open the Read Messages window kana a SE ES ES SES SS SS ES ES ESE EE SESE SE EE SS EE EES SE SESE EES SE SEES SSE SES SES EEE Sender EDMADMIH Message 1 of 16 ee Tite ahed revision 1 has bean approved by a vole of 1 approvals to 0 rejects Approved by EOKMINTN Approved Read Messages Tame azz Date foomame Type rouy EDM saraswat Reply 2 Enter the number of a message in the Go To field 3 Click Go To to read the message 4 Use the Previous and Next buttons to access the messages that are displayed in the message area Responding to Messages Use the buttons on the right to act on a message as follows Reply Opens the
115. ST BS A LODO 1 Iw PERFTEST BS LOOT 1 Iw PERFTEST BS LOOK 1 Iv PERFIEST PS 10003 1 IY PERFTEST BS 10t l I FERFTEST PS 1000S 1 I FERFTEST PS LOODG 1 Ty PERFTEST BS LOGO 1 Iw PERFTEST BS LOO 1 IV PERFTEST LOOKS 1 Ty PERFTEST BS 10010 1 Iv FERFTESI PS 10011 1 IY FERFTEST PS 10012 1 Iw PERFTEST BS 10013 1 Iw PERFTEST PS LOO 1 Ty BPERFTEST BS 10015 1 IW PERFTEST BS 10016 1 Ty PERFTEST BS Loy 1 Iv PERFTEST PS Refresh ce a Deselect Al cen ee Accessing the Vault You can gain access to the Vault by performing the signon procedure The Vault tab appears in the Data Browser after a successful signon to the Vault Choose Database gt Signon and specify the appropriate information in the signon dialog box EPD Connect User Guide 7 3 Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Using the Database Menu Options This section explains how you can work with Vault data using the options available in the Database menu The Database menu allows you to interrogate the Vault for information about data stored there This data includes the product structures component parts assemblies and other product related data You can also read and process review procedures for Vault data You can perform the following actions with the Database menu options Table 7 1 Database Menu Options Menu Option Action Signon Allows you to sign on to the Vault database See page 7 5 Application Defaults Lists de
116. Selected 3 Choose Display gt Hide gt All All components displayed in the 3D Viewer will now disappear 4 Choose Display gt Show gt Selected Only the selected components appear 5 26 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Displaying Highlighted Components The Show gt Highlighted option is often used with Hide gt All to display only highlighted components as follows 1 In the product structure tree select the components you want selected in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Select gt Selected 3 Choose Display gt Hide gt All All components displayed in the 3D Viewer will now disappear 4 Choose Display gt Show gt Highlighted Only the highlighted components appear Hiding Only Selected Components The Hide gt Only Selected option is often used with Hide gt All to hide only selected components as follows 1 In the product structure tree select the components you want to hide in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Select gt Selected 3 Choose Display gt Hide gt Only Selected Only the components not selected appear EPD Connect User Guide 5 27 Using the 3D Viewer Exiting the 3D Viewer Exiting the 3D Viewer To exit the 3D Viewer click Exit in the lower right corner of the 3D Viewer window 5 28 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 6 Clash Detection and Zoning This chapter tells you how to use the EPD Connect clash detecti
117. Store Update and Replace Commands 8 37 GET Command 8 38 READ Command 8 38 GET and READ Dependent Objects 8 39 Working with EPD Connect 8 41 Working with the Product Structure Window 8 41 Working with the Data Browser 8 41 Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines 8 42 EPD Connect User Guide Contents xv Vault Operations on CAMU Objects 8 43 Migrating PS Files from EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Revision 8 x or Earlier 8 44 Working with Dual Display About Dual Display 9 2 Using Dual Display 9 3 Viewing EPD Connect On One Display and EPD Visualizer On the Other 9 3 Viewing CADDS 5i On One Display and EPD Connect On the Other 9 3 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Overview 10 2 Features 10 2 Setting the User Environment 10 4 Identifying the Load Method 10 4 Editing the GO Script 10 4 Setting the DIVISIONPATH Environment Variable 10 5 Editing the dvise_epd_rc Script 10 6 Customizing the EPD Connect Tools Menu 10 7 Other Integration Files 10 7 Environment Variables 10 9 EPD Connect Files 10 11 DIVISION MockUp Triggers 10 12 System Requirements 10 13 Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp 10 14 DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files 10 17 Contents xvi EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Overview 11 2 File Naming Con
118. T completed successfully You have 0 EDM message s Adding Pro E attributes CAMARL100I CONFIG RULE ASM has been added CAMARL100I CONFIG OPT RULE ASM has been added CDMSOF017I Sign off from EDM completed successfully Pro E attributes added Optegra Interface for Pro E Installation Complete EPD Connect User Guide 12 5 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Understanding the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Understanding the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER The EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER collects an object and any related files from Pro ENGINEER when you execute a Vault command The store update and replace Commands on page 12 7 and The get and read Commands on page 12 7 describe the steps for executing a Vault command You can e Perform Vault transactions on Pro ENGINEER assemblies parts drawings layouts and formats e Use the Vault commands store replace update get and read on Pro ENGINEER objects e Customize the procedures The procedures performed by the EPD Interface for each command and type of object vary slightly supported Objects and Optegra Commands The following table lists the classes of Pro ENGINEER objects that are supported by this interface Classes of Pro ENGINEER Objects Object Types Object Extensions Assembly PTCASM asm Part PTCPRT prt Drawing PTCDRW drw Format PTCFRM frm Layout PTCLAY lay Please note A drawi
119. The Highlight Components By Zone dialog box opens This dialog box lists the available zones 2 In the Available Zones area select a zone by clicking on it Please note Ensure that you perform zoning on saved product structures 3 Click one of the following e Add Adds the selected zone to the list in the Selected Zones area e Remove Removes selected zones from the Selected Zones list e Remove All Removes all zones from the Selected Zones list e Visualize Displays the selected zone allowing you to examine the zone e Clear Removes all zones EPD Connect User Guide 6 7 Clash Detection and Zoning Zoning 4 In the Highlight Components area select one of the following options Table 6 3 Highlight Components Options Option Description Models All Highlights all the nodes in the product structure tree that clash with the selected zones Selected Highlights only those nodes selected in the product structure tree that clash with the selected zones Type CADDS Parts or GBF Files Type of file used for clash detection Using Geometry Uses polygon box or cylinder zones when checking for interference This method is the most accurate but system performance is the slowest Extents Attr Uses the part extents for all components in the product structure tree that have an attribute added This method provides better system performance th
120. The Vault object is copied to users s local area using the following criteria 1 The directory specified by the 1dirname parameter This is applicable when using the Command Line interface 2 The read directory specified by one of the following interface variables CA_READPREFIX CADDS interface CA_READPREFIX Pro ENGINEER interface CA_READPREFIX MEDUSA interface CA_READPREFIX CATIA interface CA_READPREFIX STEP interface 3 The current directory if the read directory variable is not defined C 6 EPD Connect User Guide Index Numerics A 3D Viewer About EPD Connect 1 2 About 5 2 Back facing polygons 5 11 Camera 5 7 Deselecting components 5 23 Display buffering 5 11 Displaying polygons 5 26 Exiting 5 28 Hiding components 5 21 Highlighting components 5 24 Icons 5 2 Introduction 1 12 Measuring distances 5 8 Mouse behavior 5 2 Moving camera 5 12 Opening file 5 4 Operations 5 2 Primary view 5 6 Purpose 5 1 Rendering 5 10 Running custom reports 5 17 Selecting components 5 21 Setting colors 5 25 Setting up session 5 4 Setting view 5 6 Showing components 5 21 Starting 5 2 Transparency 5 25 Working units setting 5 15 Absolute path name 1 16 Access indicator rules Creating 4 6 Selecting 4 9 Access rules 4 7 Multiple product structure trees 4 8 Accessing AEC applications 15 3 EPD Connect 1 19 Action Number 5 17 Adding components 3 4 Product structure tree 3 4 ADRAW 8 34 8
121. U 8 12 Tree Structure Only 8 12 Opening an Existing Assembly 8 15 Opening an Assembly Using the Data Browser Menu ___ 8 16 Opening an Assembly Using the Information Browser ___ 8 17 Opening a TIM Assembly 8 17 Opening a New Assembly 8 18 Opening Another Assembly from CAMU 8 18 Opening an Assembly Using the Product Structure Menu ____ 8 19 Activating an Assembly From the CADDS LDM 8 19 Working on an Assembly 8 20 Using Attributes 8 20 Contents xiv EPD Connect User Guide 8 20 Symmetry Using the Associative Topology Bus 8 22 Importing Pro ENGINEER Parts and Assemblies 8 22 Exporting CADDS 5 Parts and Assemblies 8 22 Verifying TIM Parts and Assemblies 8 23 Updating TIM Parts and Assemblies 8 23 Setting Variables for TIM Parts and Assemblies 8 24 Exiting CAMU and EPD Connect 8 25 Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab 8 26 Information Browser Options 8 26 Query Fields 8 26 File Menu 8 27 Filing an Assembly 8 28 Filing an Assembly with Options 8 28 Quitting Suspended Parts 8 28 Quitting and Exiting the Active Assembly 8 28 Entering the CADDS Local Data Manager 8 28 Closing the Current EPD Connect Session 8 28 Edit Menu 8 29 CAMU Application Toolbar 8 30 Copying and Pasting from the Data Browser 8 33 Limitations 8 34 Performing Vault Operations on CADDS 8 35 Overview 8 35 Features 8 35 EPD Interface to CADDS 8 37
122. Vault item to archive This leaves the object in place until an operation performs a delete Vault command Mark for Delete Mark a Vault item to delete This leaves the object in place until an operation performs an archive Vault command Unmark Remove archive or delete file markers Register Make an object accessible to users on other Vaults See page 7 34 Unregister Remove a Vault registration See page 7 35 Subscribe Associate an object with an event and a notification action See page 7 36 Unsubscribe Delete a subscription See page 7 40 Distribute Distribute an object to remote Vaults See page 7 40 Info Display information about a Vault item See page 7 41 7 16 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options signing Out Vault Items To lock a Vault item to prevent other users from accessing it 1 Select the item that you want to lock 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Signout The request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box 3 Select the item to be locked and click Apply If the item cannot be locked the Audit Transaction Log window opens with the error message Copying Vault Items to the Local Directory To copy a specific revision of the Vault item to a local directory without locking it in Vault 1 Select the item of the specific revision that you want to copy to the local directory 2 Choose Da
123. Y 4 YENDMY GY mm i yy MMe zam caut yg Riccess Filun sy Auli 34 Hom COMADMIH el Rsa l CGmad In the DOD field the Distributed Object Directory where objects are registered is displayed 3 In the Subscription field enter a name of up to 24 alphanumeric characters that uniquely identifies the subscription 4 In the Event field select the subscription event that will trigger the Action e CHANGE_OBJECT_BINARY The format of the object has been changed to binary e CHANGE_OBJECT_METADATA The format of the object has been changed to metadata e CHANGE_OBJECT_REVISION The revision level of the object has been changed e CHANGE_OBJECT_STATUS The status of the object has been changed 5 In the Action field select the appropriate action e SENDMSGU A message is sent to a user 7 38 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options e SENDMSGL A message is sent to a list of users e EXPORT_READ_REPLICA An export action exports a read only replica of a file to a list of Vaults e SYNC_REPLICA_SOURCE An export action refreshes updates the source of previously write replicated file 6 In the Expire Date field enter a date Use mm dd yy format for USA and dd mm yy format for Europe 7 Enter the Time the subscription expires in the 24 hour clock format hh mm ss For example 23 59 59 8 In the Count field enter the number
124. Y_TIME from the attribute list on the right Select Component Click Apply Creating a Display Rules Template If you use a particular set of rules on a regular basis save them to a template You can apply the template to any currently displayed product structure tree EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules The procedure for creating a rules template is the same for Access Highlight and Visibility rules 1 Select Templates in the Action field The Action rules window displays the current list of templates Tuatece Paes sar ige Dulu le Template 4 bicycle 2 Click Save The Save Template dialog box opens SAYE EMPLATE B Henr bicyrle OVERWHITE ve sa Ho 3 Enter a name for the template 4 Select an Overwrite option EPD Connect User Guide 4 17 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules 5 Click Save to save the template in the Access Highlight or Visibility Rules templates directory and to display it in the templates list Please note If you assemble several rules in the top scroll list they are all saved as one template Retrieving a Template To retrieve a template 1 Click Templates Select the template you want from the template list Click Apply to display the template rules Click Access Highlight or Visibility to apply the template rul
125. ails Please note Use the Open Vault data command to implicitly execute the Vault Get command Use the View Vault data command to execute the Vault Read command 7 50 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 8 Using CAMU in EPD Connect This chapter describes how to use CADDS CAMU within EPD Connect Overview CADDS 5i and Optegra Interoperabilty in Non English Locales EPD Connect Interface for CADDS EPD Interface for CADDS Support Opening an Existing Assembly Opening a New Assembly Working on an Assembly Using the Associative Topology Bus Exiting CAMU and EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab Performing Vault Operations on CADDS EPD Interface to CADDS Working with EPD Connect Migrating PS Files from EPD Connect and CADDS 5 Revision 8 x or Earlier EPD Connect User Guide 8 1 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Overview Overview Optegra Release 7 works with CADDS 5i Release 12 and 13 The following sections tell you how to use the CADDS Concurrent Assembly Mock up CAMU product from within EPD Connect For additional information regarding e Using CADDS in an EPD enabled environment see Installing CADDS Si e The CAMU applications see Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference 8 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect CADDS 5i and Optegra Interoperabilty in Non English Locales CADDS 5i and Optegra Interoperabilty in Non English Locales To use Optegra
126. al depiction of the product To start the 3D Viewer 1 Choose Tools gt 3D Viewer from the EPD Connect menu bar The 3D Viewer window opens displaying a main graphics window with a row of icons beneath 1t The icons are shown in the following figure 2 Choose an operation by clicking the corresponding icon Mouse Behavior The mouse operations that you can perform in the 3D Viewer are as follows Operation Your Action Tools selection Point to the item you want to select and click the left mouse button Rotation Drag with the right mouse button Zoom Drag with the right mouse button while pressing the Shift key Turn Drag with the right mouse button while pressing the Control key 3D Viewer Operations The following list of icons and their associated operations refers you to sections in this guide that contains detailed information about each operation Icon Action See E Create a new session Creating a New Session on page 5 4 Open a graphics file Opening a Graphics File from the 3D Viewer bee on page 5 4 Reset the primary view Resetting the Primary View on page 5 6 5 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer About 3D Viewer Icon Action See Set the primary view Setting a New Primary View on page 5 6 View all components in the scene Viewing All Components on page 5 6
127. ame parent at the same level having no children The selected node specifies the node to be compressed needs to replaced by a single node for display purposes After compression of one node ref_node_1 the product structure tree appears as shown below Figure 4 2 Product structure with node ref_node_1 compressed After compression of the whole tree root node the product structure appears as shown below Figure 4 3 Product structure with the entire tree compressed In the above figure the children of ref_node node_1andnode_2 are compressed because they are end leaf node The nodes attached to sec_node_1 are not compressed even though they are identical This is because they are not leaf nodes Compression is not done for reference nodes If all the children of ref_node_1in the figure are reference nodes then it will not be compressed even after you perform compression EPD Connect User Guide 4 23 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Compressing a Display Structure Example Screws in an Assembly These nodes remain as end nodes with no components added to them Typically a screw does not have any components attached to it So it is not necessary to see all the nodes You may want to see only one of a particular variety You prefer to see only one screw and its number rather than viewing all the components Compressed node enhances viewing by showing only one node in place of many identical end leaf nodes
128. an Geometry and better accuracy than Extents Extents Draws boxes around components and performs interference checking using these boxes This provides less accuracy but better system performance Zones Merged Creates one zone from all activated zones Separate Creates separate zones Transparency Enabled Creates transparent zones Disabled Creates solid zones 5 Click Apply to start the zoning process Please note You may get the message Failed to create report during the process of zoning if zoning is performed on unsaved active product structures To avoid such a situation perform zoning on a saved product structure 6 8 EPD Connect User Guide Clash Detection and Zoning Zoning Zoning in Background Mode To perform a zoning operation in the background mode do the following 1 Choose Tools gt Zoning from the EPD Connect toolbar The Highlight Components by Zone dialog box opens 2 Select the Background option to open the Available Configurations For Background Batchclash panel 3 To add the configurations on which you want to perform zoning click Add Input in the Highlight Components by Zone dialog box This opens the Background BatchClash Add Configuration dialog box Use this dialog box to select the configurations on which you want to perform clash detection and add them to the Available Configurations For Background Batchclash panel For details of field descriptions in the Backgro
129. and opening of PS and CAMU Files 6 Select a Symmetry option e YES The component is mirrored e NO The component is not mirrored This is the default option The Symmetry type option becomes inactive 7 Select a Symmetry type option e MIRROR X The YZ plane of symmetry is used to mirror the component e MIRROR Y The XZ plane of symmetry is used to mirror the component This is the default option The Symmetry type option is visible only when Symmetry is set to Yes Please note The symmetry option is visible only when the environment variable CA_USE_SYMMETRY is set to 1 8 Select one of the Units option 9 Click OK You can proceed to change the item properties of other selected nodes using the Next button Please note Child reference assemblies are not supported 2 20 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Editing Component Attributes When you apply symmetry to a subassembly all child nodes except child reference assemblies of that subassembly will be mirrored If a leaf node is modified only that node is modified where as if a subassembly node is modified all its child nodes are also modified Defining Assembly Attributes and Values Externally You can define assembly attributes and values in an external file Define each attribute in the following format STARTATTR Attribute_Name lt TAB gt Comment Value_1 lt TAB gt Comment Value_2 lt TAB gt Comment ENDATT
130. and the 3D Viewer window is cleared Opening a Graphics File from the 3D Viewer ai Ler To add geometry to your session open one or more graphics files To open a graphics file 1 Click the icon for opening a graphics file The Graphics File Selection dialog box opens O AIEEE Tay Meseria pus File Mode MF GAF GBF OL TD r Graphics ile Selection pen CARTEI 5 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Setting the Viewer Session 2 Specify the name location and format of the graphics file you want to open Field Option Description Name The name of the graphics file Directory The location of the graphics file File Mode MF Metafile GAF Textual graphic file GBF Binary graphic file _ID Tessellated file Opening a Graphics File from the Product Structure Window The Product Structure window and the 3D Viewer are linked dynamically To display the graphics file of a part 1 Select the part in the Product Structure window 2 Choose Display gt Load from the EPD Connect menu bar The geometry is displayed in the 3D Viewer Please note You cannot open a MEDUSA model in the 3D Viewer A MEDUSA model is a MEDUSA generated object and not a gbf file that can be opened in the 3D Viewer For a discussion of manipulating other MEDUSA generated objects in EPD Connect see Chapter 11 Using the EPD Interface for MEDU
131. aper Size field The paper size can range between A and E US ANSI Standard and AO and A4 ISO Standard 7 Assign a float number in the Scale field The values that you specify here must be greater than zero If you specify values greater than 1 the tree created using the CGM file is scaled up 8 Click either the Portrait or the Landscape options for specifying the orientation of the tree 9 Click the appropriate Tier option for plotting a range of levels of the tree A tier is a single vertical level in the product structure tree The root node is designated as the zero tier e All To print the entire product structure of a tree e Tiers To print a selected range of tiers in the product structure tree Refer to Printing Product Structures for printing product structure trees 10 Click Apply to complete the file creation process If the tree that is plotted using the CGM file does not fit within the given paper size multiple pages are created whose names are given using the following format lt given CGM file name without extension gt lt page row_page column gt lt cgm extension if any gt For example if the given CGM file name is mytree cgm then multiple pages are created whose names are of the type mytreel_2 cgm If you provide incorrect or incomplete information an error message appears in the main EPD Connect messages panel Plotting a Tree You can plot an AccessWare tree using the binary CGM file You can also
132. apply highlighting to the components in the 3D Viewer The Highlight menu options are Menu Command Action Selected Highlights in red in the 3D Viewer components selected in the product structure tree and leaves the color of other components unchanged Highlighted Highlights in red in the 3D Viewer components highlighted in the product structure tree and leaves the color of other components unchanged Only Selected Resets all components in the 3D Viewer to their original color and highlights in red the components selected in the product structure tree Only Highlighted Resets all components in the 3D Viewer to their original color and highlights in red the components highlighted in the product structure tree Highlighting the Selected Components To highlight in red all components selected in the product structure tree while leaving the color of other components unchanged choose Display gt Highlight gt Selected Please note Select Color All White before using this option You will easily see the highlighted red components in the 3D Viewer Highlighting the Components Incrementally You can highlight all components in red in the 3D Viewer that are highlighted in the product structure tree and leave the color of other components unchanged To do this choose Display gt Highlight gt Highlighted Color All White is useful when used with this option Highlighting Only Selected Components To
133. archical Product Structure window 1 12 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components The following figure shows the 3 Dimensional Viewer EA Ref OE PR il T For more information about using the 3 Dimensional Viewer refer to Chapter 5 Using the 3D Viewer Optional Components There are some optional add on components You can use them to complete your EPD Connect environment e Database e Dynamic Application Interfaces e Visualizer Applications EPD Connect User Guide 1 13 EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components e Web Browser Database EPD Connect can interface with Optegra Vault which provides features for classifying sorting and cataloging data files and simplifies system administration setup and archive management Dynamic Application Interfaces EPD Connect provides interfaces to product life cycle applications Files created in these applications can be stored in and retrieved from the Vault 5 ote fab ea E E T 5 m 5 a sf T ne a 5 88 5 aA a Applications Opteena Seryices i ol Interfaces The applications supported by EPD Connect are e CADDS CAMU e Pro ENGINEER e CATIA e MEDUSA e STEP e AutoCAD 1 14 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components EPD Visualizer EPD Visualizer is advanced visualization software that lets you create CAD models from graphical in
134. are saved When you choose the File gt Save As option to save a TIM assembly the root component is saved as the PS or the CAMU node depending on the application EPD Connect User Guide 2 31 Using the Product Structure Window Saving and Closing a Product Structure Tree type that you have selected in the Save Structure dialog box All of the associated TIM objects remain unchanged Closing a Product Structure Tree Closing a displayed tree removes it from the main window To do this choose File gt Close The system prompts you for confirmation and then removes the displayed tree The system displays a warning message if you have not saved changes before attempting to close the tree Please note If more than one Product Structure window with a product structure tree is open choosing File gt Close closes the configuration only in the active window Repeat this process for each active window to close all the product structure trees 2 32 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Status and Report Windows status and Report Windows Several windows are available for displaying general information such as component status or reports In some cases a status or report window appears automatically For example when you request any type of Vault transfer the Vault Transfer Request window appears and shows your queued request The following table lists and describes the path to report files
135. argument NEW to inform DIVISION MockUp that a new configuration is being created e The dvopen cf script is invoked from within the modified ca_cfg r resource file and is used to invoke the CA_TREE_TRIGGER dvopen pl script with an argument OPEN to inform DIVISION MockUp that a new configuration is being opened in EPD Connect The dvopen cf script is used to synchronize the DIVISION MockUp tree from EPD Connect through the temporary VDI file in the DVISE_TEMP_DIR directory e The dvopen p1 Perl script instructs EPD Connect to send a report and a EPD Connect message number 777 This number invokes the merge p1 script The dvopen p1 script also writes an information file dvaction into the directory specified by the EPD_TEMP environment variable e The merge p1 Perl script parses the report generated by EPD Connect This report contains information about the current tree within EPD Connect The merge p1 script converts this report into a VDI file This VDI file is saved in the DVISE_TEMP_DIR directory with a name derived from the configuration name and with the suffix vdi After the creation of the VDI file EPD Connect sends a message to DIVISION MockUp to read the newly created VDI file EPD Connect User Guide 10 7 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Setting the User Environment e The startdvise pl Perl script invokes DIVISION MockUp creates a temporary material file to export the current EPD Connect co
136. ase menu Application Defaults 7 6 Change Password 7 14 Database Defaults 7 7 Deferred Status 7 9 Multiple product structure trees 7 4 Read 7 13 Send Message 7 13 Signoff 7 5 Signon 7 3 7 5 Where Used 7 10 Databases interface to 1 14 Defaults application 7 6 Defaults database 7 7 Deferred Status 7 9 Defining Application environments 2 55 Delete Display menu 5 20 Descending Sort 3 15 Deselect Display menu 5 23 Detection Hard clash 6 6 Soft clash 6 6 Detection clash 6 2 Display buffering 3D Viewer 5 11 Display control 4 2 Display graphics file 5 4 Display menu 5 26 About 5 19 Colors 5 25 Convert 5 20 Delete 5 20 Deselect 5 23 Hide 5 21 Highlight 5 24 Load 5 5 5 20 Purpose 5 19 Select 5 21 Show 5 21 Transparency 5 25 Distributing objects Vault menu Distribute 7 40 Documentation printing from Portable Document Format PDF file xxiii DOD Primary B 9 Refresh automatically 7 15 Refresh manually 7 14 Switch B 9 E Edit menu 3 2 Add Component 3 4 Copy 3 10 Cut 3 9 Global Attribute 3 16 Paste 3 10 3 11 Redo 3 12 Set Revisions 3 18 Swap Components 3 12 Undo 3 12 Unset Revisions 3 18 Editing Component attributes 2 19 Vault attributes 7 24 EPD Interface for STEP AP203 14 1 STEP interface 14 1 EPD Connect Accessing 1 19 EPD Connect User Guide Index 3 Index Exiting 1 19 Toolbar functions 2 5 Exiting EPD Connect 1 19 Expanding Reference tree components 2 16
137. ase note For more information on customizing the EPD Connect environment see Customizing EPD Connect EPD Connect User Guide B 1 Options for System Administrators Creating Environments for Applications Creating Environments for Applications You can create application specific environments or change or delete existing ones Application environments are used to specify where files are transferred to when accessed from the Vault for read or write access For the standard product structure CAMU and CADDS applications the CADDS rulebase is utilized All these applications are therefore defined with the Rulebase toggle set to Yes When a node is displayed in the Product Structure window if its associated document has an application type that is defined as structural the node will appear as a reference EPD Connect will then allow this node to be opened to display its structure When the name of an associated document is requested by EPD Connect the Case of the document name is also controlled by this Application Environment window Setting Case to Upper in fact performs UNIX to CGOS translation You also use the Application Environment window to specify the name of the Oracle tables to be queried to obtain information about these files Typically these should be CA_FILE DIRECTORY and CA FILE ATTRIBUTES for files If the application is collection of a number of files to form a part within the Vault then the CA_PART_DIRECTORY
138. assword pdmdm Adding MEDUSA Application to Optegra Vault OK to install the MEDUSA Vault Attributes yes Enter the EDMADMIN user password edmadmin Signing on to the Vault as edmadmin CDMSONOOOI Optegra CDMSON0O16I Sign on to EDM server ADBHUT completed successfully You have 0 EDM message s Adding MEDUSA attributes CAMARL100I MEDUSA_SET has been added CAMARL100I MEDUSA DEPENDENT has been added CAMARL100I MEDUSA RULE 1 has been added CAMARL100I MEDUSA RULE 2 has been added CAMARL100I MEDUSA RULE 3 has been added CAMARL100I MEDUSA RULE 4 has been added CDMSOF017I Sign off from EDM completed successfully MEDUSA attributes added Optegra Interface for MEDUSA Installation Complete 11 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines You can add a preprocessing or postprocessing shell script or other routine to run before running the store replace update get or read commands For example if you want to ensure that a file naming convention is maintained create a preprocessing routine to check file names before a store command is executed This capability allows easy correspondence between the interface and third party applications Define preprocessing and postprocessing routines by setting the corresponding environment variables COMMAND_ PRE POST PROCESS exec
139. ault Transfer Requests STATUS COMMAND APPLCIN NAME REGISTER PS DE REGISTER PS FIRST Launch App v Yes mo Apply Gear Cancel 6 Select the object in the Vault Transfer window and click Apply to register the object Unregistering Objects To unregister an object you must first remove it from the Distributed Vault environment EPD Connect User Guide 7 35 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Appz Clear Canepl To remove and unregister an object do the following 1 Select the registered object in the Data Browser window 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Unregister 3 A request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box VEL t Tre ister 29449575 STATUS COMMAND ALTLOIX NAME 4 Select the object and click Apply to unregister it Registering And Unregistering ADRAWSs Associated with CAMU Files You can register or unregister ADRAWS associated with CAMU files when you register or unregister CAMU files in the Distributed Vault environment The default value of the CA_ADD ADRAWS IN _CAMU variable in the epdconn ini file is 1 When the value of the CA_ADD ADRAWS IN_CAMU variable is 1 then e The associated ADRAWS are registered whenever the CAMU file is registered Please note While registering a CAMU file even if the registration of one associated ADRAW fails then the CAMU file and all associated ADRAWs remain unregistered e The associated A
140. ay state is restored only for the components of the active product structure tree EPD Connect User Guide 4 21 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Compressing a Display Structure Compressing a Display Structure A product structure consists of components in the form of nodes There are two types of nodes e Reference nodes e Normal nodes A product structure may have many levels Each level consists of reference nodes normal nodes or a combination of both If there are a large number of components it becomes difficult to view the product structure and to locate a particular node or a segment of the product structure Please note There may be many nodes which are identical but all are displayed The number of such nodes is very high at the ends Compress node is only for viewing There are two options used for this purposes e Uncompress Node e Compress Node Uncompressed Node The uncompressed node is the one which is not compressed By default a tree is opened in uncompressed mode The following figure shows all nodes in uncompressed mode Figure 4 1 Product structure in uncompressed mode 4 22 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Compressing a Display Structure Compressed Node A node is called compressed if only one copy of identical node is shown along with number of nodes Compression is done on a node if there are more than one identical node to the s
141. ble settings for displaying CADDS 5i and EPD Connect Scenario Display 1 Display 2 Variable Settings CADDS 5i and EPD Connect CADDS 5i EPD Connect DISPLAY and CMOM DISPLAY are set to graphics with Product lt machine name gt 0 lor 0 1 window Structures and Visualizer CADDSSHADE window CADDS You Are Here window CMOM_DOMATIN is set to a user defined value VISUALIZER DISPLAY is setto lt machine name gt 0 lor 0 1 CADDS_ DISPLAY is set to lt machine name gt 0 0or 0 0 9 4 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 10 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp DIVISION MockUp is a product viewer that is similar to 3D Viewer and EPD Visualizer This chapter describes DIVISION MockUp a switchable product viewer that is integrated with EPD Connect This chapter discusses the following topics Overview Setting the User Environment Environment Variables EPD Connect Files DIVISION MockUp Triggers System Requirements Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files EPD Connect User Guide 10 1 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Overview Overview Both EPD Connect and the DIVISION MockUp Interactive Product Simulation IPS tool support a full hierarchical representation of a product Key to the EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp integration is a communication link between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockU
142. bly s global origin The local and the global coordinates are dependent on each other Set only one of them Select the appropriate Units option Click Close 8 Click Add to add the new component to the tree The Add Component window remains open after adding the new component in case you want to add another component to the same parent 9 Click Reset to clear all fields except Parent Name You can now add another component Please note To add a component to a different parent select a different component on the tree 3 6 EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Adding Components Adding a Component with Mirror Flag You can add an oriented component to a product structure with mirror flag using the Add component dialog box The orientation attribute value is set when CA EDIT ORIENTATION 1 The value of symmetry flag is decided depending on the selections made for symmetry options in Add Component dialog box Example To add a component with an XZ symmetry representing the plane separating the left side from the right side select e Symmetry Yes e Symmetry Type Mirror Y XZ symmetry e Orientation Global or Local e Specify the orientation and position of the mirrored component in the selected coordinate system e Click Close to validate the component insertion Adding a Component on a Compressed Node Add component can be performed on a compressed node Leaf node
143. browser to CDROM_mount_point htmldoc mainmenu html UNIX CDROM_Drive htmldoc mainmenu html1 Windows NT Printing Documentation A PDF Portable Document Format file is included on the CD ROM for each online book See the first page of each online book for the document number referenced in the PDF file name Check with your system administrator if you need more information You must have Acrobat Reader installed to view and print PDF files The default documentation directories are e EPD_HOME data html1 pdf doc_number pdf UNIX e EPD_HOME data html1 pdf doc_number pdf Windows NT EDP Connect User Guide xxiii Preface Resources and Services For resources and services to help you with PTC Parametric Technology Corporation software products see the PTC Customer Service Guide It includes instructions for using the World Wide Web or fax transmissions for customer support Documentation Comments PTC welcomes your suggestions and comments You can send feedback electronically to doc webhelp ptc com xxiv EDP Connect User Guide Chapter 1 EPD Connect Overview This chapter introduces EPD Connect and provides an overview of its components About EPD Connect An EPD Connect Scenario EPD Connect Components EPD Connect Support for Topology Bus Accessing and Exiting EPD Connect Displaying EPD Connect on Sun Solaris from HP UX Customizing EPD Connect Symmetry in EPD Connect Navigator License Consid
144. c2ps aec2ps ini The following settings in the aec2ps ini are used by the EPD Interface to the AEC applications e AEC2PS ATTR FILT SEPD HOME data aec2ps reposit aecattr ini The location of the file where the attribute filter settings are made You can control the attribute visibility and the attribute name using this file This file determines the following e The column name selected in the AEC table is equivalent to the attribute name that is displayed in EPD Connect For example UID_3D Element ID e The usage of in the first column of any entry identifies it as a comment e The application filters any column that does not appear in this file e DBMS HOST xxxx dbmsnetd xxxxx ORACLE SID Xxxx The settings used by aec2ps for connecting to the external database DBMS_HOST specifies the name of the host running the DBMS process The setting of the variable DBMS_HOST depends on the following e Ifthe caddsrc local file is present in the directory from which EPD Connect is started or is present in your home directory and the DBMS_HOST variable is set in this file the DBMS_HOST setting is used e If you have installed CADDS on the system running EPD Connect the script located in usr apl cadds scripts templates caddsre has a hardcoded DBMS_HOST setting to the local system In case you want to use the DBMS process running on another system remove the existing setting or set it to the system running the DBMS process
145. cal user interface 1 20 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview Customizing EPD Connect Customizing EPD Connect You can customize an EPD Connect CMOM client using supplied Perl modules and extensions The term CMOM stands for Common Message Oriented Middleware CMOM is the mechanism by which the desktop user interface GUI and the agent applications no GUI communicate It is the central communication handler for EPD Connect and all its constituent applications Applications EPD SERVICES Hodeling Analysis E 5 a 1 2 2 ee EFD Connect Business _ Hessage Oriented Hiddlevare When you start EPD Connect a CMOM server process is begun This process handles communication between EPD Connect components All EPD Connect customization is based on using the CMOM message passing mechanism Customizing with Perl You must have a working knowledge of Perl in order to customize EPD Connect All the functionality you need to create a simple CMOM client is available using the Perl language Supplied Perl modules and extensions provide this capability EPD Connect User Guide 1 21 EPD Connect Overview Symmetry in EPD Connect symmetry in EPD Connect This section describes the concepts of symmetry and mirroring Symmetry Symmetry allows you to mirror components without creating new left handed parts This is done by storing information about the mirroring transformation within the product
146. cation objects in the product structure hierarchy using the AEC_LINK_TBL You can see the reference nodes as child nodes along with the object type based hierarchy The reference nodes will be displayed twice on the tree These nodes are distinguished from the main nodes by a suffix that can be customized Working with AEC Cable Objects You can generate references for AEC cable objects that are related to each other beyond the hierarchical relationships that are displayed The principle of classifying the reference nodes is the same as the principle used for ASM Generating Reports for Reference Nodes You can generate reports for the selected application object by using the report List AEC References To activate this report copy the file ca_menul men located in SEPD HOME data aec2ps custmenu S LANG to SEPD_HOME data custmenu LANG before invoking EPD Connect Explore the AEC part as discussed in the earlier sections Select the required application object and choose Reports gt List AEC References to generate the report Please note Currently the above feature is available only for AEC cable objects 15 12 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model When you explore a CADDS model in EPD Connect the hierarchy and attributes of the application objects are extracted from the AEC database This is done using the program ae
147. cation or role It can be configured to user preferences and delivers familiar context sensitive views of information and applications to all users involved in the process It improves user understanding of complex products and processes making all aspects of a project accessible to all users It improves information accessibility and allows all users to get information no matter where it is located It protects existing technology investments and adds value to existing environments and applications It provides process assistants and integrates product and process views EPD Connect User Guide 1 7 EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components EPD Connect Components EPD Connect includes basic components as well as optional add on components Basic Components The base EPD Connect system contains the following components Information Browser You can gain access to business and engineering information Product Structure Window You can create edit browse and interrogate product and assembly structures Data Browser You can search and list information about data stored locally and in the Vault You can also gain access to and update this information Viewer You can visualize the tessellated files that you create with 3 Dimensional CAD systems You can select from the 3D Viewer Visualizer or MockUp Please note Visualizer and MockUp are optional components MockUp integration supports the MockUp
148. ce eee be Cancel This window shows the properties of the node that you have selected It also contains a line describing the symmetry flag EPD Connect User Guide 2 35 Using the Product Structure Window Status and Report Windows 2 Choose View gt Browser to open the Browse Configuration window Browse Configuration wv By Name XXX 1 aA Yo OS w Highlighted wv Compare Same Display Window v Compare Different Main wv Overview wvv Compare New Component Comparison Status When you perform a tree comparison a comparison report is automatically displayed The comparison report contains information you requested before the compare operation In addition to the tree comparison report you can view a component level comparison between a currently selected component and components in memory 1 Select a single component 2 Choose Window gt Memory Status The Component Memory Status Report window opens Componant hemory Statue Report Couleur ation BICYCLE PAREN ASS ha epee r_kmring l bicrele_L PARENT Frans biele L E This report displays the comparison information EPD Connect updates the Component Memory Status Report window automatically when you select or sequentially browse components 2 36 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Status and Report Windows ADRAW Items An ADRAW is a special CADDS assembly drawing that is associated to a CAMU assembly
149. clipboard Pastes selected components from the clipboard Undoes the cut paste operation Redoes the cut paste operation Reorders components by positioning Reorders components by sorting Swaps selected components Sets the selection mode to one component at a time Sets the selection mode to more than one component at a time EPD Connect User Guide 2 5 Using the Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window GW kKURe ehh h mo H Mouse Behavior Sets the selection mode to multiple subcomponents Displays the tree structure using the angled style Displays the tree structure using the fan style Displays the tree structure using the file manager style Highlights selected components Highlights components not selected Clears highlighted components Displays the respective Product Structure window Displays the clipboard Displays an overview of the tree display Displays the Data Browser window Loads the selected components Deletes the selected components In EPD Connect you can use both the right and left mouse buttons If the Product Structure tree nodes are not selected a menu with the following options is displayed when you click the right mouse button Command Action Open New Configuration Create a new product structure tree Open Old Configuration Open an existing product structure tree Exit Exit EPD Connect Choose an option to perfor
150. con 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window The 3D viewer prompts you Measure Distance From Camera To Item Digitize a vertex point 3 Digitize a point A digitize marker snaps to the nearest vertex The following message is displayed Distance to selected item distance The distance displays in working units such as inches feet or miles See Setting the Working Units for information about setting working units Measuring Distance Between Two Points To measure the distance between two points 1 Click the icon 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window The 3D Viewer prompts you with the following Measure Distance Between Items Digitize first vertex point 5 8 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Measuring Distance 3 Digitize the first point A digitize marker snaps to the nearest vertex The 3D Viewer prompts you with the following Measure Distance Between Items Digitize second vertex point 4 Digitize the second point The following message appears Distance between items distance dx distance dy distance dz distance The distance between the points is the straight line distance and is calculated in working units such as feet miles or meters The dx dy and dz distance is the delta xyz distance EPD Connect User Guide 5 9 Using the 3D Viewer Rendering Rendering z You can control the rendering of the 3D scene using the Render Control
151. ct The file naming conventions that govern TIM objects are the same as those for CADDS objects The following table lists and describes attributes that capture TIM data from the Translated Image Model assembly Attribute Description TIM FLAG Differentiates between the TIM objects and the CADDS objects TIM SOURCE Stores the details of the path and the revision of the parent Pro ENGINEER assembly The nodes of TIM objects appear in a different color The color is determined by the variable CA_TIM NODE COLOR which is set in the epdconn inifile Also the TIM assemblies are marked with the letter T Please note The attribute TIM SOURCE represents assembly nodes such as the root assembly or the reference assembly It is used only to restore the TIM data when the PS file is converted to the TIM assembly EPD Connect User Guide 1 17 EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Support for Topology Bus Limitations and Restrictions The following are the limitations and restrictions e EPD Connect recognizes all of the place holder nodes as CADDS objects or CAMU assemblies e When you replace a CADDS part or a CAMU assembly with a TIM part or an assembly or vice versa using any OS commands or in CADDS CAMU the state is not updated dynamically 1 18 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview Accessing and Exiting EPD Connect Accessing and Exiting EPD Connect EPD Connect runs on Windows base
152. ct changes in the displayed tree The structure page also reflects the subsequent select deselect or compare operations 2 34 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Status and Report Windows The Compare Same and Different fields provide comparisons of similar and dissimilar components between the displayed tree and a tree in memory The Selected field displays the total number of nodes selected in the Product Structure window when a structure is open Component Status You can obtain a status report for any selected component or for a set of components displayed sequentially in browse mode The display reflects the setting of the SYMMETRY FLAG attribute The data will be read in the PostScript file using the SYMMETRY FLAG attribute To see the status of a component 1 Select a component in the Product Structure window Alternately choose Window gt Component Status The Component Status window opens a Component Status ae Component newcomp_1 ASSEMBLY STRUCTURE DATA ITEM TYPE CADDS ITEM NAME ADJ SHAFT ITEM REVISION PARENT NAME adjuster complete_1 ORIENTATION CM DEG 4 13 4 25 0 90 00021045915 0 0 GLOBAL ORTENT CM DEG 4 13 4 25 0 90 00021045915 0 0 PARENT ASSY adjuster complete_1 LOCAL FILE STATUS DATA MODIFY DIRECTORY users shpatil parts MODIFY DATE TIME 020724 114220 ASSEMBLY ATTRIBUTE DATA STATUS Inwork INSTANCE LINK MODIFY Pea
153. ct structure tree Select the parent component and press the right mouse button to display a menu of reports This Report Option Displays This Data Parts_list The component name its Vault file name part number and description Indented_parts_list The component name its part number and description Child components are indented under their parent components Bom Bill of materials information including part numbers quantities and descriptions Assembly_weight The part and actual and planned total assembly weight Status_to_plan The part name its status and planned activities 2 44 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Printing and Displaying Reports The report is displayed in the Report Viewer window as follows i REDOFE viewer Parts list cre k h k a h i i ak i i ak yl ll k ah alk ls h h ly a ah i a A aly ly yy k ah ly nyt ka h i k ah alt ah oh ly aly iy k ah iy ly ly gm ak ah ly k yy i i ale yl ity h COFPONENT NAME EH FILE NAHE eh ly Al ly ll iy ly lay iy lly ty lla yl lg ll ly lll ly ll iil ll ay lly lly iy la iy la ll ly lly ny ll tly li lly my ll lal li lity l lif lal ly lly ltl iy adj usber asey_1 side plate sub_1 rivet Tivet_2 rivet_a side plabe_1 gear_l vore_1 arm_1 side plate sub_2 ruvet_4 Fivet_S rivet_b side plate_ shaft_1 ADIVSTER GOMPL ETE SINE PLATE SIH ADT RIVET ADJ ALYET ADJ RIVET ADJ SIDE PLATE
154. cting Components Select You can select components incrementally and non incrementally in the 3D Viewer The Select menu options are Select Menu Option Action Selected Selects components currently selected in the product structure tree while retaining components already selected Only Selected Selects components currently selected in the product structure tree and deselects previously selected components EPD Connect User Guide 5 21 Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Incrementally Selecting Components in the 3D Viewer You can incrementally select the components in the 3D Viewer To do so perform these steps 1 In the product structure tree select components you want selected in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Select gt Selected The components you have selected in the product structure tree are selected in the 3D Viewer Components already selected in the 3D Viewer remain selected Selecting Components in the 3D Viewer To select specific components in the 3D Viewer 1 In the product structure tree select the components you want selected in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Select gt Only Selected The components you have selected in the product structure tree are selected in the 3D Viewer The components previously selected in the 3D Viewer are deselected The following figure shows the handle and seat components selected in the product structure tree and the wheel c
155. cting the options in the View and Clear menus View Menu The following table explains the operations you can perform with the View menu along with pointers to sections where they are explained in detail Table 4 6 Display Command Options To Create this Display Condition Choose this Command For Details Refer to Single or multiple component selection Control Setting the Component Selection on page 4 2 Determine attribute information to display on tree components Component Text Setting Component Text Display on page 4 3 Determine the text font that labels tree components in the product structure window the Tree Overview window and the Clipboard window TreeFont Customizer Setting the Component Text Font on page 4 5 Save all the highlighting visibility access and selected states you have assigned to components in a tree structure Save State Saving Display States on page 4 20 Restore a display state previously assigned to tree components and saved Restore State Restoring Display States on page 4 21 Compress a display structure Compress Compressing a Display Structure on page 4 22 Uncompress a display structure Uncompress Compressing a Display Structure on page 4 22 Create color coded component Access Creating Access Indicator access indicators to flag components that match search criteria Rules
156. ction For more information see Moving the Camera in an Angular Direction on page 5 12 5 16 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Selecting and Scrolling selecting and Scrolling You can scroll to items in the product structure tree that are associated with a particular graphic component displayed in the 3D Viewer window To do so 1 Click the icon for selecting and scrolling in the 3D Viewer window 2 Select a graphic component 3 In the Product Structure window the product structure tree scrolls to and selects the items associated with the graphic component you selected Running Custom Reports You can select scroll and run a custom report for a component displayed in the 3D Viewer To do so 1 Specify the value Y to the variable PVS_SELECT_SCROLL_REP in the explorer ini file 2 Set the variable CA_ENV_REPORT to one of the following to specify the type of the custom report that you want to run e CA _ENV_REPORT LOOKUP lt number gt The report is fetched from the lookup rep file lt number gt is the number of the report to be run e CA ENV REPORT ACTION Report type t Tree data wanted t Program The report is fetched based on the action that you specify For details of Report type Tree data wanted and Program see the details of Action Number 6500 in Customizing EPD Connect 3 Start EPD Connect and open the required product structure in the 3D Viewer 4 C
157. ctory is as shown To change this default use the CA_STATES environment variable 2 Enter a file name in the Filename field 3 Select an Overwrite option e Yes Overwrite the current version of the file by the same name e No Does not overwrite the current version of the file by the same name 4 Select one or more display states Table 4 3 Display State Options Options Description Highlighted Saves the state of highlighting on the tree structure Access Saves the state of the access indicators on the components Visible Saves the state of the visibility of components Selected Saves the state of the selected components 5 Click Apply Please note If more than one Product Structure window with a product structure tree is open the display state is saved only for the active product structure tree 4 20 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Restoring Display States Restoring Display States To restore a display state previously assigned to tree components and saved follow these steps 1 Choose View gt Restore State to open the Restore State dialog box F Res Lure Silale Drectory Pap tie pedo Did ata ts Late Nileneune i _ Apply Reset Cater el 2 Select the state file name from the list 3 Click Apply Please note If more than one Product Structure window with the product structure tree is open the displ
158. cts only cut and paste actions It cannot undo a swap or reorder action It also cannot change or edit component attributes To reinstate the effect of the last edit action you performed before choosing the Undo command choose Edit gt Redo ryj You can also click Redo on the toolbar to perform the undo operation Swapping Component Positions You can swap the positions of two components attached to the same parent 1 Select the two components you want to interchange 2 Choose Edit gt Swap Components 4 You can also click Swap components on the toolbar to perform the swap operation 3 12 EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the Tree Structure Reordering Components You can reorder components in the following ways e By positioning a component above or below another component e By sorting components in ascending or descending order Positioning Components You can position a component above or below another component if both components are attached to the same parent 1 Select the component you want to reposition on the tree 2 Choose Edit gt Reorder Components gt Position The Position dialog box opens You can also click the Position icon on the toolbar to perform the same operation t The selected component is automatically entered in the Component field Componenti Option Component2 3 Select the second component whose position determines t
159. cts that have no database support under the parent node The GBF files for such nodes should be generated prior to exploring the nodes of the product structure If the GBF file is absent the system displays a warning message and all the objects with database support are displayed Apart from the above variables set appropriate values to the following variables in the epdconn ini file e CA AEC CUSTOM COLOR 2 The color of the AEC nodes can be changed by setting the appropriate values The default value is 2 e CA AEC OBJECTID objectid The reserved obj ectid can be customized by setting appropriate values to this variable The default value is objectid 15 16 EPD Connect User Guide Appendix A Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach This appendix explains the single tree feature that is available in EPD Connect e Overview e Features e Generating and Activating a Single DB e Reading Orientations from CAMU e Limitations and Restrictions EPD Connect User Guide Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Overview Overview The single tree approach allows an organization to manage its product information in single sets of structured trees based on PS files rather than maintaining a separate subset specifically for working with CAMU The DB file format used in the NAV CAMU mode does not allow you to store non CADDS data However you can use the PS file for
160. cts your session only if in the Database gt Database Defaults the Remote option in the Vaults to Query field is selected For more information on the Database Defaults dialog box refer to Setting Vault Access Defaults on page 7 7 Refreshing the DOD Manually To check for a DOD switch select Database gt Refresh DOD If a switch has been made the DOD settings for the active session are refreshed 7 14 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Refreshing the DOD Automatically To detect a switch automatically set the value of the DOD_SWITCH_TIME variable to one of the following settings in epdconn ini e DOD SWITCH TIME 0 A check for a DOD switch is carried out for every query to a remote Vault in the Data Browser e DOD SWITCH _TIME value_in_seconds A check for a DOD switch occurs when the value_in_seconds is greater than or equal to the difference in time since the last check and the time of the current query to aremote Vault For example if 900 is the specified value_in_seconds then a check is carried out when you query a remote Vault only if 15 or more minutes have elapsed since the last check for a DOD switch e DOD SWITCH TIME 1 The check for a DOD switch is disabled EPD Connect User Guide 7 15 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Using the Vault Menu Options The Vault menu allows you to use Vault commands to manipulate Vault data in t
161. cutable name of a DIVISION MockUp module Either dvreview or dvmockup DV_CUSTOM_EPD dvise epd rec Used only within the dvise_epd_rc file Specifies the location of EPD Connect configuration files within the DIVISION MockUp installation directory DV_EPD_ ORIENT dvise epd re Specifies rotation of root level geometry to DIVISION MockUp coordinate system Typically 90 0 0 for a rotation of 90 degrees about x axis CA TREE TRIG ON dvise epd rec Enables triggers that are required for DIVISION MockUp Do not modify CA TREE TRIGGER dvise epd rec Identifies the location of the trigger scripts Typically SDIVISIONROOT system epd trigger tree CVDPA_DVISE_COMM explorer ini The command line that starts DIVISION MockUp that is the full pathname of the startdvise pl script CVDPA_DVISE_TYPE dvise epd re The geometry file type used by DIVISION MockUp BGF Do not modify DVISE OPTIONS dvise epd re Command line options for DIVISION MockUp DVISE_ATTR DIR dvise epd re Identifies where DIVISION MockUp attribute files are saved This may be in your home directory or some other team or site specific directory DVISE_AGENT NAME dvise epd re The name of the communication agent dc iepd Do not modify DVISE_ AGENT OPTIONS dvise epd rec Options for the communications agent Do not modify DVISE_ TEMP DIR dvise epd re Identifies the location f
162. d PCs or UNIX workstations To access EPD Connect from a Windows environment choose Start gt Programs gt Optegra Applications gt EPD Connect gt EPD Connect lt release gt English To access EPD Connect from a UNIX workstation type the following command in a window SEPD HOME scripts Connect If you have more than one instance of EPD Connect running from the same installation set the EPD_ TEMP variable to a unique directory for each instance The default value for the EPD_ TEMP environment variable is SEPD_HOME tmp Please note You must have read write and execute permissions for the directory set as the value for the EPD_ TEMP variable Exiting EPD Connect m To exit EPD Connect choose File gt Exit or click the Exit icon The system prompts you for confirmation A warning message is displayed if you have not saved the changes before attempting to exit EPD Connect EPD Connect User Guide 1 19 EPD Connect Overview Displaying EPD Connect on Sun Solaris from HP UX Displaying EPD Connect on Sun Solaris from HP UX To launch EPD Connect on HP UX and display it on Sun Solaris perform the following steps 1 Set the LANG variable as follows setenv LANG C 1is088591 2 Set the DISPLAY environment variable to the display of the Sun Solaris machine 3 Start EPD Connect on the HP UX operating system This procedure is applicable for all Optegra products that use AccessWare Motif or X to create the graphi
163. d path is supplied 2 Searches for the object in the directories specified in the variable CVPATH If the object is not found the object is searched in the current directory if located the object is stored Also associated files are stored in the Vault aa MEMBER files to the object If the object is a CAMU assembly or Product Structure the product structure information is stored in the Vault as attributes If the object is a CAMU Assembly then its associated ADRAWS are stored automatically as PART if they are not already available in the Vault Please note e Operations like store update and replace fail on a CAMU assembly when the ODB_DAEMON is not running or when the DB_DAEMON_HOST variable is not set properly The following error message is displayed Unable to extract product structure information e If you have defined attribute rules that are specific to a project the associated Adrawings do not satisfy the defined attribute rules Therefore they are not processed when the CAMU assembly is stored updated or replaced The following error message appears in such cases Processing not done did not supply required attributes However the CAMU assembly gets stored correctly To resolve this e Set the variables STORE ADRAWS NO in caddsrb ini file EPD Connect User Guide 8 37 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface to CADDS CA STORE ADRAWS NO in epdconn ini file e Store update or replace the ADR
164. database _ db To view ADRAW items represented by component instances in a currently displayed product structure tree 1 Select the root node in the product structure tree 2 Choose Window gt Attachment Window The ADRAW window opens The CAMU tree is displayed in the ADRAW window You can perform Vault transfer actions from the CAMU tree by selecting a component in the tree and following the same procedure as you would when selecting from the product structure tree or Vault Transfer window Indicator Key Color coded component access indicators flag components that match search criteria This is useful when you need to distinguish characteristics such as a part s status or release date Access indicators are located at the right end of tree components You can view the current list of rules defined for color coded access indicators Choose Window gt Indicator Key to display the Color Key window Lulur Kay EJ E x m E al H E a Ej Ei E m H For instructions on creating the color rules associated with access indicators refer to Creating Access Indicator Rules on page 4 6 EPD Connect User Guide 2 37 Using the Product Structure Window Status and Report Windows Clip Board A clipboard appears when you are editing a product structure tree by cutting pasting or copying components For more information and an example see Cutting and Pasting the Components on page 3 9 Audit Log
165. down list that displays when you select this option 3 4 EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Adding Components If you select Application enter the item name in the Item Name field Optionally enter the revision level in the Revision field 7 Click Orientation The Add Orientation dialog box opens Symmetry Yes Ho Symmetry Type Hirror i Mirror Y Orientation Local s Global x Y 2 66 2 32 ANCY g 17 322 ANGZ o Units Units e MM we Radians CH Degrees sr H IN Close Default values for orientation and position are as shown in the dialog box Enter the local orientation data against the parent node a Select a Symmetry option YES The component is mirrored No The component is not mirrored The Symmetry type option becomes inactive Select a Symmetry type option MIRROR X The YZ plane of symmetry is used to mirror the component MIRROR Y The XZ plane of symmetry is used to mirror the component The Symmetry type option is enabled when CA_EDIT_ORIENTATION and CA_USE_ SYMMETRY are set to 1 It is not dependent on the local global mode since the same symmetry setup and the same symmetry flag will be associated with the current component with either mode EPD Connect User Guide 3 5 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Adding Components Enter an orientation for a component Specify X Y and Z val
166. e delete or add a part database that contains TIM data the TIM information of the node does not change when you open the assembly containing these parts EPD Connect User Guide 3 3 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Adding Components Adding Components acd Comparant This section explains about creating new components and the process of adding of components Creating New Components To create a new component for a new or existing tree 1 Select the node you want as the parent on the displayed tree 2 Choose Edit gt Add Component The Add Component window opens Porent Hane dew ste UUUSG 1 1 anme Instance 2 Humber ont 1 Asx ciali em ms Mime W Sprain lam Nana Revision Orientation Pad Heat Larne 3 Enter the name of the new component in the Class Name field Please note Use only alphanumeric characters for defining the component name and the attribute name of the node in the product structure window 4 Enter the numeric start number in the Instance field to append to the class name Each additional instance of this component replicates the class name and increments the number You need not enter anything for a single instance 5 Enter the number of instances of the new component in the Number of field 6 Select the appropriate option in the Associated Item field e None Specifies that no item is associated e Application Associates an item from the drop
167. e Add Component property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on locking components CAMU Add Component Opens the Add Component property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on adding components it CAMU Change Component Opens the Move Component property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for details on changing aspects of the selected component class gt CAMU Delete Component Opens the Delete Component property sheet See the Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide for detail on deleting components E Single Node Selection Enables you to select one specific component only If you select a second component the first is automatically deselected Ez Multiple Node Selection Enables you to select multiple individual components EPD Connect User Guide 8 31 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab EE Subassembly Selection Enables you to select an entire subassembly When you select a component all its child components are selected Angled Tree Style Dynamically changes the product structure tree style to 90 degree angle connect lines Fan Tree Style Dynamically changes the product structure tree style to fan connect lines This is the default tree style File Manager Tree Style Dynamically changes the Product Structure tree style to that of a standard File Manager Hi
168. e Hides components Show Shows components that are hidden Clear Resets components that are either selected highlighted transparent or hidden Load Loads components in the EPD Visualizer window Please note The result of the option chosen is reflected in either the Product Structure window or the EPD Visualizer window or in both depending on the application chosen in the Options panel of the Report Viewer 5 You can print the report or save it to a file You can also display and print reports by selecting them directly from the Reports menu on the EPD Connect menu bar For information on how to generate customized reports see Customizing EPD Connect 2 46 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Printing Product Structures Printing Product Structures To print the product structure tree displayed in the Product Structure window 1 Display a product structure 2 Choose File gt Print The Print Panel opens Prin Forel Print Ta a Ale Print Prid Command pr Phat Paper Sicy Orear Lalu Letter Porat mr Legal w Lanlscape mr Execulr e acale 1 3 Click File or Print to achieve one of the following results e File Creates a PostScript file which can be printed at a later time To use this option specify the name of the file in the File Name field e Print Submits your file to the default printer defined by your operating system in the Print Command field
169. e Topology Bus Using the Associative Topology Bus Use the Associative Topology Bus ATB in the Assembly mode of EPD Connect to import export verify and update Translated Image Model TIM files created from Pro ENGINEER and CADDS parts and assemblies For information on how EPD Connect handles TIM files see EPD Connect Support for Topology Bus on page 1 17 To use ATB in EPD Connect e Set the CADDS ATB ENABLED variable to YES in the epdconn ini file e Have e ENGINEER installed and running on a server e Have CADDS 5 e ENGINEER client installed and running on the client For information on other restrictions that apply to ATB see Using Associative Topology Bus Enabled CADDS 5i and Installing CADDS Si Importing Pro ENGINEER Parts and Assemblies To import a Pro ENGINEER part into CADDS as a TIM choose File gt Topology Bus gt Import The Import File CADDS dialog box opens where you can select the part or assembly to import For more information see Using Associative Topology Bus Enabled CADDS Si Exporting CADDS 5 Parts and Assemblies To export a CADDS part or assembly from the root or reference assembly into Pro ENGINEER as a TIM perform any one of the following actions e Choose File gt Topology Bus gt Export The Export File CADDS dialog box opens where you can select the part or assembly to export OR e Select a TIM node in the CAMU Product Structure window and right click to choose Export TIM from
170. e current tree then search all trees stored in the Vault for the item To search follow these steps 1 If you know where a component on a displayed tree is used select it and proceed to step 3 If you do not know proceed to step 2 2 Choose Database gt Where Used to open the Where Used dialog box Where Used Item Name l Revision f Expand Lewels B Level a Query Attribute Data H Local _ Database 3 If you selected a component on a displayed tree its name and revision are displayed in the Item Name and Revision fields Otherwise enter the information in the appropriate fields Please note In addition to the components selected from the Product Structure window the Item Name field also displays the name of any application object selected from the Data Browser However if a Product Structure window with an active configuration is open preference is given to that product structure selection In such cases close the active configuration in the Product Structure window to reflect the item name of the application object selected from the Data Browser 7 10 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options 4 In the Expand Levels field select the search level Table 7 2 Expand Levels Options Option Description All Searches the tree with all child components fully expanded Level Specifies the number of levels of referenced assemblies t
171. e described by using the following attributes e ORIENTATION X coord Y coord Z coord X rot Y rot Z rot where the 6 arguments are real values defining the position of the origin of the component in centimeters and the rotations around X Y and Z axis in radians against reference frame of parent node e GLOBAL ORIENT X coord Y coord Z coord X rot Y rot Z rot where the arguments are real values defining the position of the origin of the component in centimeters and the rotations around X Y and Z axis in radians against reference frame of root node 1 26 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview Navigator License Considerations in EPD Connect Navigator License Considerations in EPD Connect You cannot use the OptegraNavigator license to access EPD Connect functionality not available in Navigator Restrictions With the OptegraNavigator license you cannot access the 3D Viewer Clash Detection and the Zoning options from the Tools menu in EPD Connect To access the above mentioned Tools options you must upgrade to EPD Connect On upgrading a new license file is provided along with the EPD Connect license file Please note The upgrade from Navigator to EPD Connect is not free of cost EPD Connect User Guide 1 27 EPD Connect Overview Where to Look for Information Where to Look for Information The following table lists the tasks associated with EPD Connect and the chapters or appendix of this
172. e in the epdconn ini file to 1 2 Start EPD Connect 3 Open or create the required product structure a EE E a Ei Bl M c P E 3 ttt 7 Prr iaj A 4 EPD Connect User Guide Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Generating and Activating a Single DB 4 Choose Tools gt Generate and Activate Single DB from the EPD Connect menu bar to activate the single DB file in the CADDS CAMU structure mode Web Brower CADDS C amp MU Generate Activate Single DB Read Orientation from Ca ML 3D Viewer lash Detection Zoning For example if you create or open a product structure with the reference nodes of the parent assembly expanded as shown in the following figure all of the nodes of the assembly are considered for generating the single DB file in CAMU This is shown in Figure A 1 EPD Connect User Guide A 5 Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Generating and Activating a Single DB Figure A 1 Single DB Activated in CAMU rivet eee Huer side plate sub_4 n e rivet al es side plate_i 1 Sy gear m worn T adj completet_1_ Lo amil e a p rivet N m 2 S rivet_5 side plate sub_z rivet_e rd side piate_2 shaft 1 ee A 6 EPD Connect User Guide Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Reading Orienta
173. e interface checks whether or not the variable command_POSTPROCESS is set 6 If the variable is set the interface executes the command with scommand_POSTPROCESS inputfile outputfile as the command arguments Should an error occur the interface reports the error and subsequently exits this command process Phase Il Execution The Vault client executes the Vault command The selected object and any dependent files are transferred between Vault and the client Phase Ill Cleanup 1 The interface checks whether or not the variable command_PREPROCESS is set 2 If the variable is set the interface executes the command using command PREPROCESS inputfile outputfile as the command arguments Should an error occur the interface reports the error and subsequently exits this command process 3 Proceed to rulebase processing for the Cleanup phase EPD Connect User Guide C 3 Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Processing Phases 4 Complete the rulebase processing An output file is created and the command processing is completed 5 If the variable is set the interface executes the command with scommand_POSTPROCESS inputfile outputfile as the command arguments Should an error occur the interface reports the error and subsequently exits this command process C 4 EPD Connect User Guide Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Locating Objects for Vault Commands Locating Objects for Vault Commands This
174. e large structures using the Structure Overview window Edit structure Use the clipboard to rearrange components by cutting and pasting them Reuse design Reuse designs by referencing them as subassemblies of a product structure Create and edit user definable and standard attributes Attach nongraphical information such as material supplier and cost onto any component or component instance Store attributes into other EPD Connect applications for enterprise wide access View information Use colors on the component tree to represent results of attribute queries Generate reports Define new reports or customize existing reports to obtain information in a format of your choice Locate component location Query the database to learn about all assemblies in which a component is used This allows you to check how extensively a component is used in an assembly before committing to a design change Compare configuration versions Focus on specific areas of interest by graphically highlighting the differences between versions or revisions of a product structure Integrate product structure with other add on applications Mix and match applications across different components within the same assembly Use multiple application files within a single product structure You can do the following when the corresponding optional applications are installed in your EPD Connect environment e Create and modify part geomet
175. e reference assembly in the directory from which the root assembly is opened and opens it in case it exists there If the reference assembly does not exist in that directory the system opens the first occurrence of the file from the CVPATH directory If the value of the CA_SEARCH_REF_DIR variable is set to O the reference assembly is opened directly from the CVPATH 7 Specify other required settings 8 Click OK The product structure tree opens and the Open Configuration dialog box closes To keep the Open Configuration dialog box open click Apply This opens a _db file from within EPD Connect but does not activate CADDS 8 14 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Opening an Existing Assembly Opening an Existing Assembly To open an existing assembly in CAMU 1 Start EPD Connect 2 Select the Assembly folder in the Information Browser 3 Choose Tools gt CADDS CAMU to invoke CAMU The CADDS windows appear Assembly Explicit mode is the default mode 4 Choose File gt Activate Old Assembly The Open Assembly dialog box opens SS bod oe ns Ce Dear ete a Lr a Beale tn ri ene te ee en ate need BSE Ed ED adneu DEFAULT lege Directory Create Read w Other hone janjana parts Expand References All Level _ m Please note The variable CAMU _EXPAND_REF_ENABLE is set to in this case 5 In the Name field specify the assembly name or query the system for _db files using the asterisk wildcard
176. e to 1 to enable the nested reference assemblies of CAMU in the Assembly mode Please note This feature is supported only for CADDS 5i Release 11 and above CAMU_COMPNAMELEN LIMIT If the length of the component name in the product structure file exceeds the value set by this variable you cannot save the product structure as a CAMU assembly in EPD Connect EXTRACT PSATTRS Y N Set this to Y to use the Command Line Interface This is used for enabling the extraction of Product structure attributes CA READPREFIX HOME part read The location of the read directory The parts are created in this directory for the READ command CA AUDIT LOG SIZE Set an appropriate value for this variable to improve performance while adding new assemblies or opening existing assemblies This variable is also defined in the file SEPD_HOME data reposit epdconn ini The default value of 0 logs all the messages If you assign any positive integer value the audit log file is purged when the message count exceeds this value EPD_HOME opt epd dm v60 The location of the Optegra directory 8 6 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Connect Interface for CADDS e AWLANG C The setting for the language CA BINDIR EPD_HOME bin The bin directory for the Optegra software e CA NODE OVERVIEW COLOR e CA NODE SEL OVERVIEW COLOR The node colors of the overview windows can be changed by setting the appropriate values S
177. e to the coordinate system of the graphics window Each time you click the button you move away from the 3D scene and more of the scene comes into view 5 14 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Setting the Working Units setting the Working Units You can set the working units in the following way El 1 Click the icon for setting the work units The Preference Controls dialog box opens Preferance Controls Working Units we Hilli ne lers y Cerlinelers Ry Dedine lers Wed Hie lers ww Falun lers Mouse Dynamics Target Camera y Scene Move Distance Orbit Angle ose l 2 Select the required Working Units You can work in different units by setting the working units inches feet or miles When you perform 3D Viewer operations all calculations are displayed in the selected working units Set your working units in the Preference Controls window 3 In the lower half of the Preference Controls window are two slider scales for Move Distance and Orbit Angle EPD Connect User Guide 5 15 Using the 3D Viewer Setting the Working Units e Use the Move Distance slider scale to set the number of units you want to move the camera position in a linear direction For more information see Moving the Camera in a Linear Direction on page 5 13 e Use the Orbit Angle slider scale to set the number of degrees you want to move the camera position in an angular dire
178. e trees 15 5 Close Ref File menu 2 17 Closing Hidden reference components 2 17 Closing tree Component 2 16 CMOM client 1 21 Colors Display menu 5 25 Columns 7 46 Comparing multiple trees 2 27 Comparing trees 2 25 Comparison report 2 28 Component attributes 2 19 component text setting 4 3 Components Adding 3 4 Applying transparency to 5 25 Basic 1 8 Closing 2 16 Deleting from viewer 5 20 Displaying 5 21 Displaying in viewer 5 26 Editing attributes 2 19 Expanding Tree component 2 16 Hiding in viewer 5 21 5 26 5 27 Highlighting 5 24 Loading into viewer 5 20 Orientation 3 5 Positioning 3 13 Reordering 3 13 Resetting colors 5 25 Sorting 3 14 System 1 8 Viewing 5 26 Configuration browser 2 36 Configuration Compare Rules dialog 2 4 Configuration tree 2 9 Saving a display state 4 20 Constraints Storing multiple Vault items 7 20 Controlling display in product structure 4 2 Convert Display menu 5 20 Copy Components 3 10 Instance attributes 3 17 Index 2 EPD Connect User Guide Index Vault items 7 17 Copy and paste Data Browser 3 11 Create Report 12 9 Create product structure tree 2 8 Customizing Query results 7 46 Tree font 4 5 Cut edit command 3 9 cvepd ini file editing to launch applications 2 58 CVPATH 2 41 Editing 2 42 Opening a CAMU file 8 13 Selecting 2 41 D Data Browser window About 7 2 Copying and Pasting 3 11 Copying and pasting 8 33 Database Defaults 7 7 Datab
179. e window This structure is considered for compression in uncompressed mode This is done even if the product structure is in compressed mode This is done for comparison of structures 2 24 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Comparing Two Trees Comparing Two Trees The compare operation compares the active tree configuration with another stored in memory or two active tree configurations You can compare components within and between product structures optionally limiting the comparison based on specific attributes The compare operation color codes the text labels of the tree components to show whether displayed tree components are the same new or changed as compared to those stored in memory To compare two trees 1 Display an active product structure tree and store another tree in the memory 2 Choose File gt Compare or click the Compare icon The Configuration Compare Rules dialog box opens Configuration Compare Rules Compare Attribute Option All Attribute Vw Add All Vv Add Delete z Delete All Configurations in Memory Active Configurations SINGLEPS ADJ COFPL ETEL Compare Color Keys Report EC COMPARE_SUMMARY EG COMPARE_PARTS_CHANGE_L IST EG COMPARF_PARTS_DIFFERFNCF_I IST EPD Connect User Guide 2 25 Using the Product Structure Window Comparing Two Trees 3 Select attributes for comparison The Compare Attribute list contains the attributes tha
180. ect EPD Connect Interface for CADDS e If yourun the READ SPECIFIC REV command for Revision 1 the part is copied as test 1 in the READ directory A revision link is not created in this case e If yourun the READ SPECIFIC REV command for Revision 2 the part is copied as test 2 in the READ directory A revision link test gt test 2 is created in this case Please note This applies only to UNIX platforms RB EXTRACT CA_DATA appl The location of the directory where the application specific extract scripts reside The default location is CA_DATA app1l If you have customized extract scripts set this to the appropriate directory This should follow the directory structure available in EPD_HOME data appl If you want to use the customized extract scripts for PS set RB_EXTRACT to usri custom dir The extract script should be placed in usrl1 custom PS scripts e RB EXTRACT PS DIR RB_EXTRACT PS The location of the directory where the extract script for the PS application exists The default location is RB_EXTRACT PS If you have customized extract script set this to appropriate directory This should follow the directory structure available in EPD_HOME data appl1 Ps If you want to use the customized extract scripts for PS set the RB EXTRACT PS DIR to usr1 custom PS directory The extract script should be placed in usri custom PS scripts RB EXTRACT PS_DIR setting has precedence over RB_EXTRACT setting This
181. ect generated by MEDUSA and can be viewed only from within the MEDUSA application It is not a gbf file and hence cannot be opened in the 3D Viewer e To use the EPD interface for MEDUSA with EPD Connect locally you must disable the existing Vault support If you want EPD Connect to list and recognize the application interface types but have not disabled Vault support then the first entry in the pm config must identify a vault that is configured for the installed interfaces For more information see Installing EPD Connect EPD Roles and EPD Visualizer EPD Connect User Guide 11 3 Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Setting up MEDUSA Support on the Vault setting up MEDUSA Support on the Vault To set up MEDUSA support on the Vault run the following as Vault administrator only after you have run either navinstall or navrefresh EPD_HOME install medinst kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Installation Utility kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enter the user id of your Vault Administration account name OK to add MEDUSA Application Environment to Optegra Vault yes Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm Checking New Tables in ORACLE Database New tables already exist Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager p
182. ects not got the total objects selected for read the total objects read and the total objects not read 8 40 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Working with EPD Connect Working with EPD Connect Using EPD Connect you can apply Vault commands on CADDS objects such as CADDS Parts Product Structures CAMU Assemblies and ADRAWSs EPD Connect does the following Lists CADDS objects located on the local disk and in the Vault Allows you to transfer data between the local disk and the Vault Provides creation of new Product structures and CAMU structures Provides editing saving of the existing Product structures and CAMU structures Provides database management for structuring and accessing information Working with the Product Structure Window To open a PS structure or a CAMU structure 1 Click Query for the list of available structures The Query Option dialog box opens Select the required application PS or CAMU Its location can be either Local Disk or Database Right click The Data Browser menu opens Click Open to load the structure in the product structure window See Chapters 2 4 for additional information on working with product structures Choose File gt Open The Open Configuration dialog box opens Click Refresh to refresh the Data Browser Window Working with the Data Browser To open the DataBrowser 1 2 Choose Window gt Data Browser Choose the Vaul
183. ed more than one Product Structure window with the product structure configuration the options that you select for the Tree State the Browser State the Compress Nodes and Scroll Report are applied to all the Product Structure windows when you click Apply Setting Component Text Display You can add attribute information to display components on the product structure tree The original state of the component information is stored with the tree and can be easily restored to the display EPD Connect User Guide 4 3 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Selecting and Displaying Components Add component attribute information to the tree display as follows 1 Choose View gt Component Text The Component Text Display dialog box appears Damp ene Teet Tap lay UP THe 3CUMPONEM IT HOME ShUctune FE Ob INCH We Calt E Component W Struchire Al ib la COPE DRENT SLA ANE Delimiter LASTARLL LTLM LEPL TYFH BART TIFM REVISIT BERET LAE 2 Choose either Component or Structure or both for the type of Edit 3 Click an attribute in the Attribute list to display it in the Component and or Structure fields Repeat for each attribute you want displayed Each attribute you select is appended to the text Please note The default delimiter between attributes is a space Use the Delimiter field to specify a different delimiter such as an underscore _ 4 Click Apply to display the attribute information on the pr
184. either shell or flat polygons in the 3D Viewer A shell polygon is a network of interconnected polygons that share common points and result in a unit typically called a polyhedron Shell polygons can be smooth shaded by the 3D Viewer However flat polygons cannot A flat polygon requires a minimum of three points to define a plane To display polygons use one of the following two options Menu Command Action Load Shell Instructs the 3D Viewer to display polygons as shell polygons Shell Polygons treatment improves rendering but system performance is slower than with flat This setting remains in effect until reset Load Flat Instructs the 3D Viewer to display polygons as flat polygons Polygons Flat treatment gives better system performance but poorer rendering This default setting remains in effect until reset This option is reversed by Load Shell Polygons Using the Display Options Examples By selectively viewing and hiding components you can focus on specific areas of an object Many of the options for displaying components in the 3D Viewer are used with other options Examples of the ways you can use these options follow Displaying Selected Components The Show gt Selected option is often used with the Hide gt All option to display only selected components as follows 1 In the product structure tree select the components you want selected in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Select gt
185. election Control dialog box controls both the Product Structure and the Information Browser windows 2 Select a Tree State option e Single This setting allows you to select only one component at a time Selecting another component automatically deselects the previously selected component Eaj You can also click the Single icon on the toolbar to perform the same operation e Multi and Node This allows you to select an unlimited number of components Ea You can also click the Multi Node icon on the toolbar to perform the same operation 4 2 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Selecting and Displaying Components e Multi and Subassy This allows you to select an unlimited number of subcomponents In addition you can automatically select all the children of a parent by selecting the parent bac You can also click the Multi Subassy icon on the toolbar to perform the same operation 3 Select a Browser State option 4 Select a Compress Nodes option to specify if the node is Uncompressed or compressed 5 Select a Scroll Report option e Yes The Report Viewer scrolls to the component selected in the Product Structure window For more information see Printing and Displaying Reports on page 2 44 e No The Report Viewer does not scroll to a component selected in a Product Structure window This is the default 6 Click Apply Please note If you have open
186. erations in EPD Connect Where to Look for Information EPD Connect User Guide 1 1 EPD Connect Overview About EPD Connect About EPD Connect EPD Connect links multiple Electronic Product Definition EPD applications in a common desktop environment It provides simultaneous access to the software tools that are included in an EPD process It also provides an interconnected EPD work environment With EPD Connect you can Create or open a hierarchical representation product structure tree of all the parts that compose a product This information is presented in the Product Structure window Individual parts are displayed in a logical tree structure that shows their relationship to the overall product structure Create or review information such as attributes associated with each part listed in the product structure tree Display the three dimensional geometry of any part in a Viewer Access company supplier or personal information that is pertinent to your job responsibilities You can open product data stored in a database word processing files stored on project disks and other files stored on a local disk inside the tool that is used to manipulate that data You can also access internet and intranet sites from EPD Connect Access information through the Information Browser Query the information and display it in the Data Browser Track the work processes followed by members of the product development team Me
187. erence Information Browser User Guide Installing EPD Connect EPD Roles and EPD Visualizer Vault End User Guide EDP Connect User Guide xxi Preface Book Conventions The following table illustrates and explains conventions used in writing about Optegra applications Convention Example Explanation EPD_HOME cd E PD_HOME install Represents the default path where the current UNIX cd EPD_HOME install Windows version of the product is installed Menu selections Vault gt Check Out gt Lock Indicates a command that you can choose from a menu Command buttons and options Mandatory check box AC button Description text box Names selectable items from dialog boxes options buttons toggles text boxes and switches User input and code Wheel Assy details xvf dev rsto Enter command gt plot config Enter the text in a text box or on a command line Where system output and user input are mixed user input is in bold System output CT struct aename Indicates system responses Parameter and variable names tar cvf dev rsto filename Supply an appropriate substitute for each parameter or variable for example replace filename with an actual file name Commands and keywords The ciaddobj command creates an instance of a binder Shows command syntax Text string SRFGROUPA or SRFGROUPA Shows tex
188. erences for Users setting Interface Preferences for Users A number of EPD Connect options can be controlled by GUI Preferences These settings may apply to all users specific users lists of users in a command list or workstations An option is controlled by setting parameters that enable disable or set limits to it 1 Select Admin gt GUI Preferences to add change or delete graphical interface parameters w PSFFER 7 F5 TEM CHT TAT UATRESTET TT plin gt Adil en ara LUHAAN S LL a TE llr emu E Hmn Iel Wirka ir Fesat a 2 Select Option to add change or delete a parameter If you select change or delete select an existing parameter from the list You can select Query to re query the GUI Preferences list from the database 3 Select one of the Parameters from the list The meaning of each parameter and its possible values are Parameter Description Value CA _ADRAWS IN REVIEW Specifies that Adrawings can be sent Enabled Disabled for review along with other Vault items By default this parameter is enabled CA_GUI_REVISION The revision of EPD Connect which is A regular expression valid to connect to the Vault CA_GUI_VERSION The version of EPD Connect which is STANDARD valid to connect to the Vault This is set when working with the CA Programmatic Interface EPD Connect User Guide B 11 Options for System Administrators Setting Interface Preferences
189. es 1 Select the objects components in the structure you want to convert 2 Select CATASSY files in the Data Browser 3 Choose Display gt Convert The selected objects components are converted into gbf or gaf files according to your specification in the cvepd ini file 13 8 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 14 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 The EPD Interface for STEP AP203 allows you to present STEP data in EPD Connect STEP is the acronym of the Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data an industry standard representation of product information The interface for STEP AP203 currently supports STEP application level 203 AP203 This chapter includes the following sections e Overview e Features e Creating STEP Output e Limitations EPD Connect User Guide 14 1 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Overview Overview The formal designation of STEP is the ISO 10303 Product Data Representation and Exchange Vendors suppliers contractors and customers can share product information across applications and platforms for the full engineering and manufacturing life cycle when they use STEP STEP stores files in the following standard formats e ISO 1030 21 Clear Text Encoding of the Physical Exchange Structure e ISO 10303 203 Configuration Controlled Design an ISO standard for transferring mechanical part data including assembly definitions and configuration attributes The E
190. es to the component tree Select a different Action option to return to the main display area EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Defining the Display State for TIM Components Defining the Display State for TIM Components When you are working with components whose nodes are associated with TIM parts or assemblies use the TIM data from the TIM assembly when you define the highlight the visibility and the access rules for these components Assign the following values to the attribute TIM FLAG Table 4 2 Values for the TIM FLAG Attribute Value Results 0 Non TIM objects namely only CADDS CAMU objects will be marked for defining the highlight the visibility and the access rules Other applications like PS Pro ENGINEER parts or assemblies are ignored TIM parts and assemblies will be marked Any other value than those assigned does not affect the TIM components EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Saving Display States saving Display States You can save all the highlighting visibility access and selected states you have assigned to components in a product structure To save these states to a file 1 Choose View gt Save State The Save State dialog box opens o Sara State Maradalaa tate BICYCLE ves s Ho E Hiqhlic hte E ces E hlu E zucl Reset Cancel The default dire
191. et this variable in EPD_HOME data reposit epdconn ini e EDM_DM_USER User ID for accessing the Vault tables e EDM DM PASSWD User password for accessing the Vault tables e EDM DM PASSWD Encrypted user password for accessing the Vault tables ALLOW ALPHANUMERIC INST Set this variable to 1 to change the numeric instances of a component to alphanumeric instances The default value is 0 which does not allow the above operation This variable does not affect the adding of a component in any way Components that are modified to have alphanumeric instances do not participate in calculating the next instance that is to be added or the highest instance of the class and other calculations in the copy paste operations e EPDEXIT CADDSEXIT Set this variable to 1 to exit the CADDS session gracefully when you quit the EPD Connect session in the Assembly mode This is the default setting If you want to work with CADDS even after you exit the EPD Connect session set this variable to zero e CA OPEN ALL REFERENCES This variable allows you to control the expansion of instances of the reference nodes The default value of 0 opens only one reference instance in the Read Write mode If the value of this variable is set to 1 and the PS or the CAMU files are opened in the Write file mode with the Expand References option set to A11 only one reference instance is opened in the Read Write mode while the other instances are opened in the
192. evert to your default system user name password and Vault server click Reset 3 Click Signon to sign on to Vault A message indicating the status of the sign on procedure is displayed in the EPD Connect message field To sign off from the Vault choose Database gt Signoff On signoff the Data Browser window switches to Local mode and a successful signoff message is displayed in the EPD Connect message field EPD Connect User Guide 7 5 Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Viewing Application Directories To identify the default Create and Read directories set for you by your system administrator do the following 1 Choose Database gt Application Defaults The Application Defaults information window opens Application Defaults Popcation feos af Create Directory fusers srurlidh parts aS Read Directory fusers sur lidh parts read eed Cancel 2 Select an application from the drop down list The default Create and Read directories are displayed Please note You can view this information without signing on to the Vault 7 6 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options setting Vault Access Defaults To set defaults for Vault access follow these steps 1 Choose Database gt Database Defaults The Database Defaults dialog box opens It displays the default information specified for the user in the EDM DEFAULTS file
193. ewer window at a depth that you specify You can set the camera position camera target or both setting the Camera Position Al To set a new position for the camera 1 Click the icon for setting the camera target 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window 3 Digitize a point The camera moves to that new point Setting the Camera Target To set a point around which the orbit tools will operate 1 Click the icon for setting the camera target 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window 3 Digitize a point The 3D scene conforms to the new camera target setting the Camera Position and Target a A a To set a new camera position and camera target 1 Click the icon for setting the camera position and target 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window 3 Digitize the camera position point and target point EPD Connect User Guide 5 7 Using the 3D Viewer Measuring Distance Measuring Distance You can measure the distance from the camera position to a selected point in the 3D scene and measure the distance between two points in the 3D scene The distance between two points is measured by e The straight line distance calculated from vertex to vertex e The delta xyz distances expressed as the xyz component parts of the straight line distance Measuring Distance from Camera to Point F l H mg mM iI To measure the distance between the camera and a point 1 Click the i
194. existing Vault support If you want EPD Connect to list and recognize the application interface types but have not disabled Vault support then the first entry in the pm config must identify a Vault that is configured for the installed interfaces 12 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Support EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Support To set up Pro ENGINEER support on the Vault run the following as Vault administrator only after you have run either navinstall or navrefresh EPD_HOME install proeinst kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Installation Utility kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enter the user id of your Vault Administration account name OK to add Pro E Application Environment to Optegra Vault yes Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm Checking New Tables in ORACLE Database New tables already exist Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm Adding Pro E Application to Optegra Vault Addition of Pro E Application to optegra Vault Complete OK to install the Pro E Vault Attributes yes Enter the EDMADMIN user password edmadmin Signing on to the Vault as edmadmin CDMSON000I Optegra CDMSON016I Sign on to EDM server ADBHU
195. f components and then the browser was used to display those components in the Structure Overview window Structure Overview E T c wa AEL LUINN fit W i M EPD Connect User Guide 4 27 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Browsing for Components 5 To sequentially scroll the display to each component in the group you are browsing select one of the following options Table 4 5 Scrolling Options Options Description Next Scrolls the display to the next component in the group being browsed Previous Scrolls the display to the previous component in the group being browsed Goto Moves the display to the position of the nth component in the browse sequence For example if a highlight display rule highlights 15 components scattered throughout a large tree and you specify GOTO 9 the browse facility goes to the ninth component of the 15 highlighted components Please note As the display moves around the configuration the current component number is shown in the Messages field 4 28 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Creating and Clearing Display Conditions Creating and Clearing Display Conditions This chapter has discussed a variety of ways to create and clear display conditions for product structure tree components This section summarizes the display operations you can perform by sele
196. face for CADDS Support If you have refreshed Optegra Vault of an earlier release with Distributed Vault and Distributed Object Directory run the navrefresh script Please note For navinstall and navrefresh scripts make sure you install the CADDS Application Environment If you have already run one of them but did not complete the installation run the following as Vault administrator EPD_HOME install cadinst kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Installation Utility kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OK to add CADDS Application Environment to Optegra Vault yes nter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm nter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm i m Q hecking New Tables in ORACLE Database nter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm ter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm i m B Q hecking New Tables in ORACLE Database nter the Vault Oracle IQF userid pdmqf nter the Vault Oracle IQF password pdmqf t m Creating New Tables and Views in ORACLE Database Toolkit Table creation Complete Enter the Vault Oracle database manager userid pdmdm Enter the Vault Oracle database manager password pdmdm Adding CADDS Application to Optegra Vault Addition of CADDS Application to optegra Vault OK to install the CADDS Vault Attributes yes Enter the EDMADMIN u
197. fault directories by application See page 7 6 Database Defaults Sets default behaviors for database transfers See page 7 7 Vault Accesses the Vault menu that provides the options to interact with the Vault See page 7 3 Deferred Status Reports on the status of deferred Vault transfer requests See page 7 9 Queries Allows you to query the Vault database for information Where Used Finds where a component is used Select only from the product structure window See page 7 10 Read Messages Shows messages received See page 7 13 Send Messages Sends messages to other users See page 7 11 Change Password Changes Optegra user password See page 7 14 Refresh DOD Refreshes the Distributed Object Directory See page 7 14 Signoff Signs off from the Optegra database See page 7 5 Please note If more than one Product Structure window is open you can use the Database menu options only on the active product structure 7 4 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Vault Signon and Signoff Procedures To sign on to Vault follow the steps given below 1 Choose Database gt Signon The Signon to the Vault dialog box opens Signon to the Yault User Hame NKOUROS Password St A signon Reset Cancel DE 2 Enter your User Name Password and Vault Server name If multiple vaults are configured choose one from the drop down list To r
198. fferent Product Structure windows The nodes that clash are indicated by the indicator color of a component in the product structure tree For more details refer Detecting Clashes on page 6 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Working with Four Product Structure Windows Identifying a Product Structure Window by the Name You can identify the Product Structure windows by the name of the active configuration in that Product Structure window Choose Window gt Structure Window The submenu of the Structure Window option displays the names of the configurations that are active in the Product Structure windows Please note Ifthe Product Structure windows do not have any active configurations then the submenu of the Structure Window option by default displays One Two Three and Four When you click the Product Structure window the name of the active configuration is displayed on the EPD Connect title bar When you close the active configuration or move it to memory the identification of the Product Structure window and the names of the Product Structure configuration that are displayed in the submenu of the Structure Window are reset EPD Connect User Guide 2 15 Using the Product Structure Window Closing and Expanding Reference Components Closing and Expanding Reference Components A reference component indicates another data file The data file of the main assembly does not contai
199. fines a rule for a given value of the selected attribute e Attribute Defines a comparison between two attributes 7 Click Apply to create the rule 8 Click Highlight to apply the rule to the component tree The message line displays the total number of components highlighted including the number highlighted as a result of the new query The highlighting is applied to the components that satisfy the applied rules in the list applied as the Boolean operator AND or OR In addition any components already highlighted by a previous action remain highlighted To remove the highlighting from the displayed tree click Clear or choose Clear gt All Highlight from the menu bar Please note The procedure for changing or deleting a highlight rule is the same as described for changing or deleting an access rule For more information refer to Changing a Rule on page 4 9 You can save highlight rules to a template and recall them as needed For more information refer to Creating a Display Rules Template on page 4 16 Highlighting by Value The following procedure highlights bicycle tire components that have been assigned the attribute pressure 1 Click Value the initial default 2 From the Attribute list select pressure EPD Connect User Guide 4 11 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules In the Test column select A o In the Value field specify 60 psi
200. for Users Parameter Description Value CA _REQRV_ PREFIX Specifies the default prefix of a fileset created when multiple objects are sent for review The prefix should be a maximum of 8 characters Default value is MOBJREQRV This setting overrides the client setting in the epdconn ini file Alphanumeric DEFERRED REQUESTS Specifies the Deferred File Transfer options available from the Database Defaults window Enabled Disabled BATCH CONCURRENCY Specifies the maximum number of batch transactions that can be processed simultaneously Integer EDM PRIVATE Specifies if the ability to store files and query against private Vault data is available Enabled Disabled EDM PROJECT Specifies if the ability to store files and query against project data in Vault is available Enabled Disabled EDM PUBLIC Specifies if the ability to store files and query against public data in Vault is available Enabled Disabled MIN NO WILD CHARS Specifies the minimum number of characters that need to be specified when querying the Vault in the Data Browser Integer EPD Connect User Guide Options for System Administrators Setting Interface Preferences for Users Parameter Description Value MULTI DOMAIN EDM Specifies if many Vaults can be accessed from EPD Connect Enabled Disabled QUERY ACCESS ONLY If Enabled the access rules t
201. for their modification such as the Data Browser Component Status Store and so forth EPD Connect User Guide B 5 Options for System Administrators Defining Applications Perform the following steps to edit application definition attributes 1 Select Admin gt Appl Definition Apih Reset Cancel 2 Select an Option to Add Change or Delete standard Vault attributes for an application 3 Select one of the Applications from the list 4 Select one of the five standard Attributes from the list 5 Specify a Label for the attribute 6 Specify the Size of the attribute The maximum size for each attribute is Attribute Maximum Size User Type 8 System Type 8 Part Number 20 Description 25 GT Code 32 7 Specify a Default Value The default is no default value 8 Specify whether the Case is Upper or Mixed The default is Mixed 9 Specify whether the attribute is Read only or not The default is No B 6 EPD Connect User Guide Options for System Administrators Defining Applications 10 In Visible specify whether the attribute is to be displayed or not The Default is Yes 11 Click Apply to add change or delete the attribute definition EPD Connect User Guide B 7 Options for System Administrators Setting Application Project Relationships setting Application Project Relationships Select Admin gt Appl Project to control the Vault in which an application
202. formation generated by a variety of CAD systems Using EPD Visualizer you can Enter the CAD models visually and traverse paths through them Record animated movies as you move through the models and play them back later Simulate virtual walk throughs of 3D scenes such as power or process plants offshore platforms and ships manufacturing and office facilities and civil sites These 3D scenes can be accented with lights and specific material surfaces such as chrome to create shadows and reflection for greater realism Access the Database Management System DBMS for live engineering data through the SQL interface Analyze complex models through sectioning interference checking and path traversal MockUp MockUp is a graphical visualization software that lets you analyze and simulate a variety of 3D CAD models MockUp provides the following features Management of large assemblies Heterogeneous CAD support Effective Visualization and interaction mechanisms Effective communication tools Multi user collaboration EPD Connect User Guide 1 15 EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components Web Browser EPD Connect allows you to open a Web browser while working in the EPD Connect desktop You can specify browser information in the following fields in the epdconn ini file Variable Description EPD_HTMLBROW_DIR The directory that contains the browser executable For example usr local bi
203. ghlight Selected Components Displays a red border around all structure components that you have selected Selected components are yellow by default Highlight Not Selected Components Displays a red border around all structure components that you have not selected Non selected components are aqua blue by default Clear Highlighted Components Removes the red border around all structure components Show the Structure Window Opens the Product Structure window and displays the entire product structure 8 32 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab IQ Show an Overview of Tree Display Opens a new window illustrating the entire Product Structure and containing a box that contains the structure area currently visible in the Product Structure window I Show the Vault transfer panel HEI iad Opens the Vault Data Browser window See Query Fields on page 8 26 to see a list of information fields Copying and Pasting from the Data Browser You can copy CAMU and product structure assembly nodes as well as CADDS parts from the Data Browser to the clipboard and paste them in a CAMU assembly in the Product Structure To do this 1 Open a CAMU assembly in the Product Structure window in Assembly mode 2 Select the components from the Data Browser right click and choose Copy from the popup menu 3 Choose the components on the clipboard that you want to pas
204. ghlighted components This option may save time if the structure s geometry is complex and you want to convert only certain nodes You cannot save multiple independent components or subassemblies to one STEP file The following methods are useful when you save a product structure e Add the corresponding trace links by choosing View gt Link gt Selected to automatically select the required trace links e Copy the chosen components to a new structure and save it as a STEP file Converting STEP Files to CAMU Assemblies To convert a STEP file displayed in the Product Structure window into a CAMU assembly 1 Export the product structure to CADDS format as described in Converting STEP Files to CADDS Files 2 Close the active STEP configuration 3 Open the file specified in step 1 by choosing File gt Open or by using the Data Browser to locate the structure file 4 Choose File gt Save as gt CAMU A CAMU file results from the above operation Performing EPD Connect Actions on STEP Files Once a STEP file is read into EPD Connect normal EPD Connect functions such as zoning and clash detection apply The following sections briefly describe some available functions EPD Connect User Guide 14 11 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Creating STEP Output Reviewing STEP File Attributes and Component Status To review a STEP file s attributes 1 With the STEP file s product structure active in the
205. he Data Browser window You can perform the following actions using the following Vault menu options Table 7 3 Vault Menu Options Menu Option Action Get Latest Rev Copy the latest revision of a Vault item to a local directory Signout Lock a Vault item to prevent modification by others See page 7 17 Read Specific Rev Copy a specific revision of the Vault item to a local directory without locking it in Vault See page 7 17 Update Copy the current version of an item to the Vault but leave it locked for your use only See page 7 17 Replace Move an item back to the Vault and unlock it See page 7 17 Reset Unlock a Vault item that is signed out without signing it back in See page 7 18 Store Store a local item in the Vault as a new item See page 7 18 Copy Create a copy of a Vault item See page 7 21 Change Attributes Change the attributes of a Vault item See page 7 23 Edit Attributes Edit the attributes of a Vault item See page 7 24 Refresh Attributes Refresh the attributes of a Vault item Change Revision Change the revision of a Vault item See page 7 25 Change Status Change the status of a Vault item See page 7 25 Request Review Request a review an R type Vault message for a Vault item See page 7 26 Respond to Review Respond to a review an N Type Vault message for a Vault item See page 7 30 Mark for Archive Mark a
206. he Data Browser window by clicking on the Data Browser icon 2 Choose the Vault tab 3 Click on the Options button at the bottom of the window The Query Options dialog box opens Hb pte 3 fond Devtab ah Hame HIES 4 Choose the General tab to specify the query information such as the Application type the Name of the component and the Revision level of the component Use an asterisk as a wildcard in the Name field to query all component names or a subset of component names in the Vault EPD Connect User Guide 7 43 Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault 5 Choose the Database tab to specify Vault specific query options The Query Options dialog box opens Query Options _ Gass any lt r Public s Private ae Project Status I El Used by F n mule Sys Code None s Archive y Deele y Reserve Review ws In use User Type System Type Review Msq v ves mo PartNo of Deseription f GT Co enced oK Apply Reset Gear Cancel 6 Choose and click one of the Classes The following table defines each of the class options Table 7 4 Class Options Options Description Any The class is irrelevant Public The object has no designated owner Private The object is owned by a Vault user Project The object is owned by a defined project 7 Select from the Status list the components you want to query 8 Enter the User Name User T
207. he Report list in the Configuration Compare Rules dialog box 3 Click Compare The Report Viewer window opens POLCECCOCOC fl sb OC CEEOL Or ADT CAMI I 29 39 40 ASSEPBLY Z 2 ADJ CAHJ REVISD0N DATE 2 23 38 58 CUFEUNENT HIDE SSURMAIY Habehing Nodes 14 Changed Hodes i Hew Nodes DO Deloted Nodos SIDE FLATE SUH SIDE PLATE SD 2 28 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Comparing Two Trees Saving a Report To save the report perform the following 1 Click Save The Save Report Results dialog box opens Dove Report Results Results Mie bicyek4 canparc Cuerwnitc Wes Mo 2 Enter the file name under which you wish to save the report 3 Click the Overwrite option if necessary 4 Click Save Printing a Report Click Print in the Report Viewer window to print the report A compressed product structure will be printed in compressed mode Comparing TIM Components When you compare a component with another component stored in the memory that has TIM objects associated with the nodes the attribute TIM FLAG is also compared If the TIM FLAG is different for both the components the node is displayed as a changed node EPD Connect User Guide 2 29 Using the Product Structure Window Saving and Closing a Product Structure Tree saving and Closing a Product Structure Tree When you change a product structure tree save it to the local disk before clo
208. he repositioning of the first 4 Select one of the following options e Above Places Component above Component2 e Below Places Component below Componentz2 5 Click Apply to reorder the components EPD Connect User Guide 3 13 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the Tree Structure tf Sorting Components You can sort components attached to the same parent in ascending or descending order 1 Choose Edit gt Reorder Components gt Sorting The Sort dialog box opens You can also click Sort on the toolbar to perform the same operation Please note At this point selections in the Product Structure window are cleared The previous selections are restored after the sort or if you click Cancel Parent side plate sub 2 0 Order asc 7v Desc SelectedNodes Apply Reset Cancel 2 Select the components to be sorted The names of the selected nodes appear in the Selected Nodes field The name of the parent node appears in the Parent field Please note e If you select nonconsecutive components only the selected components are sorted The position of other components is not changed e In the Assembly mode if you sort components of a reference assembly of which there are multiple instances in the same structure then the sort is reflected on all instances of the reference assembly EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the
209. hed based on the attribute rules All the mandatory attributes are retained and the optional attributes are deleted Changing the Status or Revision of a Vault Item To change the status of an item do the following 1 Select the status in the Vault Transfer window 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Change Status The Change Status Dialog box opens Change Status 7 emapeeiernanietee Application PS Name RGMPSZ Revision Fy r New Status Be Current Status iw o Comment Changing the status to RI OK Reset Cancel 3 Select a status from the New Status drop down list EPD Connect User Guide 7 25 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 4 Type any comment and then click Apply to implement the change The Comment field is optional To change the revision of a Vault item do the following 1 Select the revision in the Vault Transfer window 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Change Revision The Change Revision dialog box is displayed Change revision of an Item dizu DA IRGMPS2 Curent Revision Hew Revision Item Password Apply ea 3 Enter the appropriate information 4 Click Apply Reviewing Vault Items During a project the work in progress must be reviewed by the project team A project must be approved before its release The two stages of the review process are as follows e Requesting the review of a Vault item e Respond
210. iewer To load a product structure configuration in EPD Visualizer 1 Launch EPD Visualizer by editing the explorer ini file e Comment the following lines CVDPA VIS NAME SCVPDA EPD3dViewer COMM CVPDA VIS _TARGET EPD3dViewer e Remove the comment for the following lines CVDPA_VIS_NAME CVPDA Visualizer COMM CVPDA_VIS_TARGET Visualizer Please note To launch 3D Viewer choose Tools gt 3D Viewer 2 Select the nodes from the Product Structure window and choose Display gt Load gt Selected The components are loaded in the Viewer Similarly load the components from other Product Structure windows The Viewer displays the components loaded from different Product Structure windows 2 12 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Working with Four Product Structure Windows Identifying the Product Structure Window from Which a Component is Loaded You can identify the Product Structure window from which a component is loaded into the viewer To identify the Product Structure Window select the component from the viewer On selecting the component the corresponding node is highlighted in the Product Structure window from which it is loaded and the status indicator of the Product Structure window changes to green Comparing Tree Components Across Product structure Windows To compare tree components of active tree configurations across product structure windows 1 Choose File gt Compare or click the Co
211. in a product structure tree can be associated with the application used to create and modify them For example a component could be a product specification document That document can be associated with the publishing tool used to edit it When components are associated with an application in this way you can launch the application directly from the Product Structure window If the environment includes Vault you can also launch the application when you transfer the component from the Vault When the application is opened you can either view or modify the component depending on the user and component authorizations Launching Applications To launch the application associated with a component 1 Select the component in the product structure tree and press the right mouse button A menu is displayed 2 Choose one of the following e Launch to Modify Launches the application and allows you to make any necessary changes to the component e Launch to View Launches the application to display the component No modifications are allowed Defining Component Application Associations To launch an application from a component in a product structure tree the component must be associated with the application The following sections describe how to define such an association You must e Define the application s environment e Associate the component with the application e Edit the EPD Connect launch ini file e Edit the EPD
212. in the Information Browser window Because the Assembly folder is selected only CAMU type assemblies appear in the Data Browser window Please note The Open menu option opens the Open Assembly property sheet Opening a TIM Assembly You can open TIM assemblies in the same way that you open CAMU assemblies If the associated components of the assembly nodes are also TIM objects the TIM nodes are displayed in a color that is specified by the variable CA_TIM_NODE_COLOR The TIM assemblies are marked by the letter T If you open CAMU assemblies that have TIM assemblies as reference assemblies the TIM reference assemblies remain closed However if you open the TIM reference assemblies using the Open Close Reference option that appears in the File menu when you set the variable CAMU_REF_EXPAND ENABLE to 1 in the epdconn ini file the TIM flag T appears for these assemblies EPD Connect User Guide 8 17 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Opening a New Assembly Opening a New Assembly To open a new assembly 1 Start EPD Connect 2 Select the Assembly folder in the Information Browser 3 Choose Tools gt CADDS CAMU to invoke CAMU The CADDS windows appear Assembly Explicit mode is the default mode 4 Choose File gt Activate New Assembly The Open Assembly dialog box opens DEFAULT me fe Directory Create Read Other hone g janjana parts Expand References lt 7 All Level m 5 Specify
213. indow Highlight Rules OP ATTRIBUTE TEST CASE VALUE _ _ E_ E_ E_ E E amp amp amp amp i amp E E E _ E E E E E_ _ _ _ x PA Operator s AND at OR Action v Templates y Add wW Change Delete Attribute B value 7V Attribute SOURCE_NAME SOURCE_REVISION cost description designer i due date material Ignore Case plamed cost planned weight ves Vv No weight Highlight Clear Apply Reset Cancel 2 In the Operator field choose an operator The following operators are available 4 10 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules e AND This is the default When more than a single rule is defined this operator combines the rules and highlights the nodes that satisfy all the rules e OR When more than a single rule is specified this operator combines the rules and highlights the nodes that satisfy any of the rules Please note You can combine two or more rules using either the AND or the OR operator However you cannot combine the rules using both the AND and the OR operator 3 In the Action field select Add 4 From the Attribute list select the attribute you want to use for the test 5 From the Test column select the appropriate operator in the test field See page 4 8 for a brief description of each option 6 Choose an attribute option e Value De
214. information on hardware operating systems memory and disk space requirements refer http www ptc com partners hardware current division_ mockup htm Please note No additional licenses are required EPD Connect User Guide 10 13 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp The communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp is handled by an agent process dciepd This process translates bidirectional messages from CMOM to the DCI format used by DIVISION MockUp The integrated system performs the following communication functions e Responds to the following EPD Connect functions e Create a configuration e Open a configuration e Open a reference e Add a component e Edit component properties e Close a configuration e Close a reference e Cut a component e Paste e Load Delete Hide and Show e Transparency and Color e Select Components e Undo and Redo e Start DIVISION MockUp e Restore configuration from memory e Update DIVISION MockUp tree e Exit EPD Connect e Executes a trigger C routine in response to the selected operation and passes salient information about that operation to an external report script Perl script 10 14 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp Executes the report script to tra
215. ing Only Selected Components Exiting the 3D Viewer Clash Detection and Zoning Detecting Clashes 5 23 5 24 5 24 5 24 5 24 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 27 5 27 5 28 Clash Detection in the Foreground Mode Clash Detection in Background Mode Viewing Clash Detection Results Hard Clash Detection Soft Clash Detection Reporting Clash Detection Results Zoning Activating Zones 6 7 Zoning in Background Mode 6 9 Working with Vault Data The Data Browser Window 7 2 7 3 Accessing the Vault Using the Database Menu Options 7 4 Vault Signon and Signoff Procedures 7 5 Viewing Application Directories 7 6 Contents xii EPD Connect User Guide Setting Vault Access Defaults 7 7 Invoking Database Transfer Actions 7 8 Transferring Data and Starting Applications 7 8 Deferred Vault Transactions 7 9 Searching for a Component 7 10 Sending and Responding to Messages 7 11 Sending Messages to Other Users 7 12 Reading Messages 7 13 Changing the Vault User Password 7 14 Refreshing the DOD 7 14 Refreshing the DOD Manually 7 14 Refreshing the DOD Automatically 7 15 Using the Vault Menu Options 7 16 Signing Out Vault Items 7 17 Copying Vault Items to the Local Directory 7 17 Updating Vault Items 7 17 Replacing Vault Items 7 17 Unl
216. ing editing options and click Apply to confirm the changes Options Description Delete Deletes the selected directory of the CVPATH from the list Add Adds the specified directory to the CVPATH directory list after the selected After directory in the list Add Adds the specified directory to the CVPATH directory list before the selected Before directory in the list Change Changes the path of the selected directory in the list When you select a directory and click Change the Add Dir field displays the selected directory Click Apply to change the path Move Allows you to move the selected directory in the CVPATH list upward one level Up Move Allows you to move the selected directory in the CVPATH list downward one level Down When you click Apply in the SELECT CVPATH dialog box the changes are permanent You cannot trace the original setup by clicking Reset Please note e If there are no directories in the current CVPATH the options Add After and Add Before add a directory to the CVPATH list without any priority e You can edit the Add Dir field only if you select the Add After Add Before and the Change options e You cannot specify the path name of a directory that has more than 40 characters EPD Connect User Guide 2 43 Using the Product Structure Window Printing and Displaying Reports Printing and Displaying Reports You can display and print reports related to the produ
217. ing to the review request At this stage the reviewers can either approve or reject a Vault item Requesting Reviews You can request the review of single or multiple Vault items at a time 7 26 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Requesting a Review of a Single Vault Item Request a review of a Vault item as follows 1 To select a Vault item perform one of the following actions e Inthe Data Browser select a Vault item e Inthe Product Structure window select a node 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Request Review 3 The Request Review dialog box opens where the Application Name and Revision fields are filled automatically Figure 7 2 The Request Review Dialog Box for a Single Vault Item Please review this file by 30 November 2004 _oK eet 4 Type your comments in the Comment field 5 Click OK to send the request EPD Connect User Guide 7 27 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Requesting a Review of Multiple Vault Items Request the review of multiple Vault items as follows 1 To select a set of Vault items perform one of the following actions e Inthe Data Browser select the Vault items e In the Product Structure window select the nodes Please note e You cannot select a combination of Data Browser items and Product Structure nodes when requesting a review From this combination only the Product Structure nodes are selec
218. ion Condition for Selecting Option Yes If the application files are to be stored as a part in the Vault No If only a single file is to be stored EPD Connect User Guide B 3 Options for System Administrators Creating Environments for Applications 11 Case file names are specified in e Upper Uppercase characters e Mixed Both uppercase and lowercase characters e Lower Lowercase characters 12 Click Apply to apply the application environment modifications B 4 EPD Connect User Guide Options for System Administrators Defining Applications Defining Applications In the Vault each file or part has five standard attributes associated with it They are DESCRIPTION GT_CODE PART NUMBER SYSTEM TYPE USER_TYPE Please note The above attributes are not case sensitive For example Description attribute is the same as DESCRIPTION attribute It may also have additional customized attributes The Application Definition window lets you specify different presentations and behaviors for these attributes for each application type You can use these attributes to control the following behaviors The label used to prompt for the attribute The size of the text field The default value required The case of the text field Whether the attribute value can be changed or not Whether the attribute is displayed These behaviors are applied to all the windows that display the attributes or allow
219. ion in the United States and or other countries Licensed Third Party Technology Information Certain PTC software products contain licensed third party technology Rational Rose 2000E is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation VisualCaf is copyrighted software of WebGain Inc VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics Inc VKI containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of and is copyrighted by Tech Soft America Inc G POST is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of Intercim VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech Pro PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology Moldflow is a registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation The JPEG image output in the Pro Web Publish module is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group DFORMD DLL is copyrighted software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed METIS developed by George Karypis and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota can be researched at http www cs umn edu karypis metis METIS is 1997 Regents of the University of Minnesota LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 1990 2001 Visual Basic for Applications and Internet Explorer is copyrighted software of Microsoft Corporation Adobe Acrobat Reader is copyrighted software
220. ion of EPD Connect Please note This setting is applicable only when signing on to the database After signing on you can reconfigure the Data Browser Registering Objects Registering an object makes it is accessible to users on other Vaults To register an object do the following 1 Select the object in the Data Browser window 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Register The Register Objects dialog box opens Reg sve Rk an Don Heit Ag aky y Pood ite Owr linl ETTEGI 7 34 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 3 The DOD field displays the name of the Distributed Object Directory DOD for the distributed Vault environment The DOD also indicates where objects are registered 4 In the Type field select one of the following types of registration Type Description Query The object is represented in the Distributed Object Directory DOD but cannot be accessed by users Read The object can be accessed for read only operations Write The object can be accessed for read write operations Ownership The object can be accessed for read write operations In addition it is authorization for an export move operation Use this special privilege only to move an object from one Vault to another Vault in a Distributed Vault environment 5 Click Apply A registration request is transferred to the Vault Transfer requests dialog box V
221. irst entry in the pm config must identify a Vault that is configured for the installed interfaces EPD Connect User Guide 14 13 Chapter 15 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect The EPD interface for the AEC applications allows you to work with AEC application objects in EPD Connect This chapter discusses the following topics Overview Features Limitations Working with Application Objects in the Product Structure Window Working with 3D Viewer Working with EPD Visualizer Setting up AEC Support for EPD Connect Correlating AEC Objects with Visualization Applications Generating Reference Nodes for Application Objects Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model EPD Connect User Guide 15 1 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Overview Overview The EPD Connect interface for the AEC applications allows you to Explore and view the CADDS application objects in the Product Structure window of EPD Connect Extract the hierarchy and attributes of the explored model from the AEC external database Display the hierarchy of the application objects in EPD Connect Execute the EPD Connect commands on the explored structure in the READ ONLY mode Create reports based on the extracted product structure Interact with Visualization applications at the application object level This process is bidirectional 15 2 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Con
222. ive product structure when you choose Main and click Apply EPD Connect User Guide 4 5 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules setting the Component Display Rules EPD Connect lets you sort and display tree components based on the criterion specified such as part name revision or component attribute The system searches for components that match the specified criteria Depending on the visibility rules set up it displays the results e Color coded component access indicators to flag components that match search criteria This is useful when you need to distinguish characteristics such as a part s status or release date Highlighted components that match the search criteria This is useful when you need to distinguish a set of components having the same feature e Hiding components that match the search criteria Components are hidden according to a set of predefined visibility rules Please note The procedure for creating display rules is similar in each of the Access Highlight and Visibility Rules command windows Creating Access Indicator Rules Access indicators are located at the right end of the tree components The color of the access indicator of a component corresponds to a specified attribute value Components having a common attribute value are displayed with identically colored access indicators Avec Indieaior In the above figure all instances of cla
223. lashes Exclude Contacts Calculates contacts occurring within the contact tolerance but does not report them Use this option when you do not want contacts reported EPD Connect User Guide 6 3 Clash Detection and Zoning Detecting Clashes Table 6 1 Clash Detection Options Clash options Description Contact Tolerance Sets the allowable deviation You can specify a tolerance for each application of clash detection Units CM MM IN Specifies the tolerance units as centimeters CM millimeters MM or inches IN The default is centimeters Soft Clash Checks for proximity between components based on the soft clash tolerance you have set Soft Clash Tolerance Sets the allowable deviation Any distance smaller than this value is considered proximate but not necessarily a clash Units CM MM IN Specifies the proximity tolerance units as centimeters CM millimeters MM or inches IN The default is centimeters Select the Select options Table 6 2 Select Options Select Option Description Clash All vs All Sel vs Sel Sel vs Hig Sel vs All All vs All performs clash detection on all the components checking each component against all the other components without components being selected Sel vs Sel checks for clashes between the selected components Sel vs High checks for clashes between the selected components and the highlighted c
224. lick the icon for selecting and scrolling in the 3D Viewer 5 Click on the component in the 3D Viewer A custom report appears as per the CA_ENV_REPORT variable settings that you have defined EPD Connect User Guide 5 17 Using the 3D Viewer Selecting Application Objects selecting Application Objects You can select a CADDS component or an application object in the 3D Viewer window To do so 1 Click the icon for selecting masks in the 3D Viewer window The Selection Masks dialog box opens Graphics File wf Item 2 Use the Graphics File option to select a CADDS component in the 3D Viewer This is the default option 3 Use the Item option to select a required application object in the 3D Viewer 5 18 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Display Menu The EPD Connect Display menu allows you to perform the following tasks e Load components from the product structure tree into the 3D Viewer e Delete components from the 3D Viewer e Convert CADDS parts to graphic files e Manipulate the view of an object by removing and hiding components e Apply highlighting transparency and colors to components displayed in the 3D Viewer e Setting display methods for polygons The Display menu lists the following options Display Menu Option Action Load Loads components in the product structure tree into the 3D Viewer Delete Deletes compone
225. llowing pseudocode shows the sequence of actions followed by the MEDUSA Interface when a user issues a Vault command The actions vary slightly according to the object processed SHEET SYMBOL or MODEL Differences are noted Initial phase Checks if variable lt command gt _PREPROCESS is set or not If set executes it with lt command gt PREPROCESS inputfile outputfile as arguments In case of error exit Proceed to rulebase processing for initial phase Complete the rulebase processing Output file is created Checks if variable lt command gt _POSTPROCESS is set or not If set executes it with lt command gt _POSTPROCESS inputfile outputfile as arguments In case of error exit Command processing is over Execution phase Execute Vault command For the selected object transaction with the Vault takes place by actual movement of object and dependent files between the Vault and Client Cleanup phase Proceed to rulebase processing for Cleanup phase Complete the rulebase processing Output file is created Command processing is over EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Sequence of Actions for MEDUSA Objects The following table describes MEDUSA objects and their treatment by the interface rulebase commands Object Special treatment SHEET By the store commana 1 All objects listed either as dependent files or referenced master objects are submitted to be stored
226. lor palette and finally launches the agent program dciepd that manages communications between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp The upddvise p1l Perl script synchronizes the tree in DIVISION MockUp to that of EPD Connect using the report number 777 The upddvise p1 script is also invoked by the Update DIVISION MockUp Tree item in the modified Tools menu in EPD Connect The lookup rep command file generates a file containing node information from Product Structure window Add tab separated tokens to the lookup rep file in the EPD Connect installation directory in the following format Report Report type Tree data wanted Program The lookup rep file is located in EPD_HOME data reports For DIVISION MockUp integration in versions earlier than Optegra Release 6 add the report number 777 to the lookup rep file as follows 777 PERL ALL CA TREE TRIGGER merge pl 10 8 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Environment Variables Environment Variables The following environment variables are used by the EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp Variable Where Used Meaning DVISE DIR dvise epd re Specifies the working directory for DIVISION MockUp typically SHOME your home directory DVISE MAT DIR dvise epd re Specifies the directory for the DIVISION MockUp material file Should be SDVISE_DIR material DVISE NAME dvise epd rec Specifies the exe
227. low of EPD Interface Commands This appendix explains the process flow of the EPD Connect interfaces Introduction e Processing Phases e Locating Objects for Vault Commands EPD Connect User Guide Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Introduction Introduction The process flow information provided in this section applies to the following EPD Connect interfaces e EPD Connect interface for CADDS e EPD Connect interface for Pro ENGINEER e EPD Connect interface for MEDUSA e EPD Connect interface for CATIA e EPD Connect interface for STEP These interfaces support the following Vault commands e STORE e GET e READ e UPDATE e REPLACE C 2 EPD Connect User Guide Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Processing Phases Processing Phases The interface commands that manage object transference between EPD Connect and Optegra Vault are executed in three phases e Initial Processing e Execution e Cleanup Phase Initial Processing 1 The interface checks whether or not the variable Scommand_PREPROCESS is set 2 If the variable has been set the interface executes the command using scommand_PREPROCESS inputfile outputfile as the command arguments Should an error occur the interface reports the error and subsequently exits the command process 3 Proceed to rulebase processing for the initial phase 4 Complete the rulebase processing An output file will be created 5 Th
228. low these steps 1 Choose View gt Browser to open the Browse Configuration window Browse Configuration wv By Name XxX 1 kal by Parent 7 w Highlighted man vV Overview wv Compare Different v Compare New 2 Select a browse option Table 4 4 Browsing Options Options Description By Name Locates components by name You can enter the name or choose from the drop down list of components in the tree By Parent Locates components by name and associated with its parent You can enter the name or choose from the list of components in the tree Highlighted Locates highlighted components Compare Locates components that are the same by comparing it with tree configurations Same stored in the database Compare Locates components that are different by comparing them with tree Different configurations stored in the database Compare Locates components that are new by comparing them with tree configurations New stored in the database 3 Select one of the Display Window options 4 26 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Browsing for Components e Main to display results in the main Product Structure window e Overview to display results in the Structure Overview window 4 Choose Window gt Structure Overview to open the Structure Overview window In the following example a highlight rule was applied to a group o
229. lt for each EPD Connect client before you start EPD Connect e A list of all the Vaults in the Optegra network that use the same DOD configuration When EPD Connect starts it checks whether the Vaults specified in the ANSPATH are online Therefore many entries in the ANSPATH variable would delay the EPD Connect startup Switch a DOD when e The Vault is from an Optegra Network e The Vault is configured to its original default primary DOD e The new primary DOD is configured as an alternative DOD for a Vault e The Vault database authentication parameters for EDM_DM_USER EDM_DM_PASSWD are the same as the signed on Vault EPD Connect User Guide B 9 Options for System Administrators Switching the DOD Making the Switch To switch the DOD select Admin gt Switch DOD The Switch DOD dialog box opens Switch DOD SARASWATI Po l The name of the Vault that you are signed on to is displayed in the Vault field You cannot modify this field In the DOD field click the adjacent icon to see the list of DODs available In the BAA list along with the name of the DOD its distance from the site is also displayed to help you choose the DOD closest to you To switch to the new DOD click OK Please note For information on how users are informed of a switch in the DOD refer to Refreshing the DOD on page 7 14 B 10 EPD Connect User Guide Options for System Administrators Setting Interface Pref
230. m of four product structure configurations at a time using the File gt New option You cannot create a new assembly until one of the four opened product structures is closed 2 8 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Opening a Product Structure Tree Opening a Product Structure Tree You can display product structure files that are stored on your local disk you can display product structure files stored in the Vault if your EPD Connect environment includes Vault access This section describes how to access local product structures To view local data you need only read access To display a product structure stored in the Vault refer to Chapter 7 Working with Vault Data Opening a Product Structure Tree from a Local Disk To open a product structure tree from a local disk 1 2 5 6 Choose File gt Open to open the Open Configuration dialog box Enter an existing configuration name in the Name field To find out the name of existing configurations a Enter an asterisk in the Query Pattern field Click the Query button The Available Configurations dialog box opens b Click the name of the configuration you want to open The information is read into the Open Configuration dialog box Specify the Revision level If you do not specify a revision number the latest revision is retrieved Specify the application type in the Application field or select one from the drop
231. m the corresponding action EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window If a Product Structure tree node is selected a menu with the following options is displayed when you click the right mouse button Command Action Parts_list Display a report containing the component name its Vault file name part number and description Indented_parts_list Display a report containing the component name its part number and description Child components are indented under their parent components Assembly_weight Display and the actual and planned total assembly weight of the part Status_to_plan Display the name status and planned activities for a part Bom Display bill of materials information including part numbers quantities and descriptions Launch to modify Launch the application in which the component was created and modify the component file contents This option is available only if an application is associated with the component For more information refer to Launching Applications from Product Structure Components on page 2 55 Launch to view Launch the application in which the component was created and view the component s contents This option is available only if an application is associated with the component Explore Object Explore the model and display the hierarchy and the attributes of the CADDS
232. mat to store both the CADDS as well as the non CADDS data Hence in cases where you have to store data both in the PS file format as well as the DB file format the synchronization of data becomes difficult The single tree feature resolves this problem to a certain extent by allowing you to store data only in the PS file format which enables you to modify only the orientations in CAMU The working process in the CAMU environment becomes much simpler and easier because the CAMU session uses a single DB that is generated from a product structure having multiple subassemblies PS files The following table compares the existing NAV CAMU features to the single tree features Single Tree NAV CAMU Allows only a limited interaction Allows complete interoperability between EPD Connect between EPD Connect and CAMU and CAMU Does not allow multiple users to work on Supports concurrency the single CAMU database Allows you to work on the single DB Allows you to save the changes permanently temporarily Recommended only for mature and Can be used from the conceptual phase until the stable product structures that would not design phase be subjected to many changes Please note e Do not use this feature unless the existing NAV CAMU options cannot fulfill your requirements e You cannot use the CADDS session that is started for the single tree generation for the NAV CAMU operations A 2 EPD Connect User Guide
233. mbers of a team can view the project schedules and commitments People working on interdependent projects can see how their work relates to that of others Open and work with the design application used for product development A design engineer can access Pro ENGINEER CADDS CAMU CATIA or MEDUSA parts from within EPD Connect Use EPD Visualizer to display product parts and assemblies 1 2 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview An EPD Connect Scenario An EPD Connect Scenario This section describes a hypothetical EPD scenario It assumes that the EPD Connect desktop includes Vault and CADDS both of which are optional components Gale eho O Co Tez Product Structure view User s Appicat on Workspate In the sample scenario a design engineer who works for a large automobile manufacturer is responsible for designing the dashboard for a new automobile EPD Connect User Guide 1 3 EPD Connect Overview An EPD Connect Scenario Before beginning the actual design of the assembly the designer must become familiar with the other automobile assemblies that are located near the dashboard The designer must be aware of the schedule and work processes being followed by the design teams that are working on related assemblies A designer would perform the following tasks using EPD Connect to begin work on the dashboard design tasks 1 The designer must first become familiar with the product design proce
234. mpare Option icon in the Product Structure window tool bar The Configuration Compare Rules dialog box opens 2 The Active Configurations list displays the configurations that are active in all the Product Structure windows Select a configuration from the Active Configurations list Please note The Configurations in Memory list displays the configurations that are selected across different Product Structure windows and stored in the memory To restore the configuration and make it active select the configuration and click the Restore from Memory button 3 Click the Product Structure window to select another configuration for comparing with the configuration that you selected earlier 4 Select the attributes for comparison 5 Click Compare to compare the selected product structure configurations The compare operation color codes the text labels of the tree components to show whether displayed tree components are the same new or changed as compared to those stored in memory For more details refer Comparing Two Trees on page 2 25 Please note When you select an item in the Active Configurations list the selection is cleared for the item selected in the Configurations in Memory list EPD Connect User Guide 2 13 Using the Product Structure Window Working with Four Product Structure Windows Highlighting Components by Zone Across Product structure Windows You can highlight components by zone across different Prod
235. mponent the data of that _ps file is not accessible because the main assembly no longer points to the reference _ ps file Example The ringer _1 and keypad_1 components contain hidden subcomponents miccuphuoce_1 weg ringer_1 Nsa keypad 1 ws chassis_1 To expand a hidden tree component 1 Select the ringer_1 component 2 Choose View gt Clear gt Selected Hide In the following figure the ringer_1 components are expanded E clapper 1 o rimer bae 1 i rungac_L a Ea hel 1 E lla q e To hide the selected components select the components and choose View gt Hide gt Selected e To hide the highlighted components highlight the components and choose View gt Hide gt Highlighted Please note For additional information see Expanding and Closing Hidden Reference Components on page 2 17 2 18 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Editing Component Attributes Editing Component Attributes IE Each component has identifying attributes Attributes optionally associate a component with an application and assign it a geometric orientation You can edit the properties of an existing component in a product structure and change the orientation attribute values when CA_EDIT ORIENTATION is set to 1 To edit attributes 1 Select the component in the product tree structure 2 Click the edit icon in the Product Structure window or click E in the st
236. n EPD_HTMLBROW_NAME The name of the browser For example netscape EPD_HTMLBROW_CMDFMT The required command to remotely communicate with the browser The command should necessarily include the absolute path name For example usr local bin netscape3 0 1 netscape noraise remote openURL s You can directly access URLs relevant to your work by adding them to your Information Browser When you click on the node in the Information Browser the corresponding web site is displayed in your Web browser Choose Tools gt Web Browser from the menu bar to display the Web browser EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Support for Topology Bus EPD Connect Support for Topology Bus Associative Topology Bus provides the facility to share geometry topology and assembly structures among different CAD environments The topology bus operation in EPD Connect allows you to insert a Pro ENGINEER object as a Translated Image Model TIM in the EPD Connect environment TIM objects are created by converting the Pro ENGINEER objects to CADDS parts or assemblies You can access TIM parts and assemblies both in Structure mode as well as the Assembly mode of EPD Connect The Associative Topology Bus in the Assembly mode provides you a heterogeneous environment where both CADDS and Pro E parts and assemblies can be used together For more information refer to Chapter 8 Using CAMU in EPD Conne
237. n information about reference components or their children The main assembly contains only a pointer to the reference data file You can open a reference component as a main assembly because it has its own data file Access indicators identify reference components Component names are followed by access indicators e A square All subcomponents are displayed e A triangle The component is an unexpanded reference component or it has hidden subcomponents Reference components are displayed in a different color Expanding One or More Reference Components To expand one or more reference components 1 On the Product Structure window select the reference components 2 Choose File gt Open to expand the reference components Please note If you expand more than a single reference component you can edit only the Location File Mode Expand References and Query Attribute Data fields in the Open Configuration dialog box All other fields are disabled Refreshing Exoanded Reference Components To refresh expanded reference components 1 Set the REFRESH MODIFIED variable in epdconn ini This variable controls the refresh operation of the modified reference components The values are as follows e If set to 0 a reference component that is modified but not saved is not refreshed e If set to 1 all selected reference components are refreshed irrespective of the modifications that are not saved EPD Connect User Guide
238. n off highlighting colored outline from all All Highlight components Redisplay all hidden components All Hidden Reset component text color coded by a compare All Compare operation to default black text on blue background Reset access indicator colors to the default All Access Apply all reset options in one operation All access All Flags indicators and selected highlighted linked and hidden components are reset to the default display state Remove the highlighting only from those components Selected Highlight that are both selected and highlighted Redisplay components that are selected and also hidden Selected Hide Please note If more than one Product Structure window with a product structure tree is open you can use the clear menu options only on the active product structure EPD Connect User Guide 4 31 Chapter 5 Using the 3D Viewer This chapter explains how to use the 3D Viewer The 3D Viewer provides basic visualization of simple tessellated files that you create from any 3D CAD system About 3D Viewer Setting the Viewer Session Setting the View Setting the Camera Measuring Distance Rendering Moving the Camera Setting the Working Units Selecting and Scrolling Selecting Application Objects Display Menu Exiting the 3D Viewer EPD Connect User Guide 5 1 Using the 3D Viewer About 3D Viewer About 3D Viewer The 3D Viewer allows you to perform tasks upon the graphic
239. n which you made the selection The List Database dialog box opens List Database Name Revision List Where List Type Output M LOCAL W DATABASE Long y Short overwrite VY Append 3 Select the report options you want to generate EPD Connect User Guide 7 41 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 4 Click OK The report is displayed Uilatiuseflueal Layk Yao MAINI ESNA EERE Tet METIS MAT TR ATATEST PE LON DE a ea ee AURAL WUY PILECS AKI Sa Tiel Jhr aAirr Avac ktart nre Mi fer 8 T shearer te sacktart ne Cee IARRI KERN PTFE Iien You can save the report to a file or print it You can also append the report to previous reports to incrementally build a report on a set of items 7 42 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault Obtaining Information from the Vault This section tells you how to do the following e Use the database Query Options to view attribute information from the Vault e Access product structure trees in the Vault and display them in the Product Structure window e Obtain status information about deferred Vault transactions Querying Vault Data You can obtain information about components files or parts attributes history projects users or audits stored in the Vault To do this 1 Choose Window gt Data Browser The Data Browser window opens You can also open t
240. ndow is a graphical tool that engineers and project managers can use to create edit browse and interrogate product and assembly structures The Product Structure window provides access to the many components that comprise complex product assemblies The window displays a product structure as a hierarchical tree showing the logical relationships among components and their subassemblies Use the commands available in the Product Structure window to query assembly and component attributes associated with the displayed product structure You can highlight query results on the tree or list them in reports that detail requested attribute information 2 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window EE Open the Product Structure window using one of the following methods e Choose Window gt Structure Window from the EPD Connect menu bar e Click the Product Structure window icon e Choose File gt New or File gt Open e Select an item in the Data Browser window press the right mouse button and choose Open from the pop up menu The Product Structure window appears as shown below You can drag the tree in the window while pressing the left mouse button Product Structure Active SS oe mei newt __ neva Fg Q euMiclPlels aod Peg Please note You can open a maximum of four Product Structure windows at a time using
241. nect Features Features The EPD Connect interface for accessing the AEC applications enables you to Construct the hierarchy information for the application objects within a given CADDS model by interacting with the AEC database Extract relevant attributes from the AEC database This is presented in EPD Connect in a customized manner Identify the application objects in EPD Connect as well as the Visualization applications like Visualizer and 3D Viewer Bidirectionally interact with the application objects EPD Connect User Guide 15 3 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Limitations Limitations The EPD interface for accessing the AEC applications has the following limitations e Any changes made to the hierarchy and attributes of the application objects within EPD Connect are not reflected in the AEC RDBMS e Visualization applications such as Pro FLY THROUGH and dVise are not supported e The explored model displayed in EPD Connect is static Any subsequent changes made to the AEC database are not dynamically reflected in EPD Connect You must explore the database again to reflect the changes e The hierarchy must originate from a CADDS model 15 4 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Working with Application Objects in the Product Structure Window Working with Application Objects in the Product structure Window To explore a model and display
242. nent is dependent on the original component because they correspond to the same part and are instances of the same component class When an instance is mirrored within CAMU it will have to be understood as is within EPD Connect when Interrogating or building the product structure Loading the assembly into a viewer Converting the product structure from to CAMU or Vault Storing the product structure from to CAMU or Vault The default plane of mirroring is set to X Y using environment variable CA DEFAULT MIRROR_PLANE Components Modified During Mirroring The following components are modified during mirroring Add Component Adds an oriented component into the structure Edit Properties Modifies the system attributes values associated to a component and its children if any Component Status Displays the attributes of a component Interface with Visualizer and 3D viewer Loads components into Visualizer or 3D viewer and gets correct display of the oriented components TRANSPVS Transforms Visualizer graphic file by specified orientation data translation rotation symmetry CADDS2PVS Converts _ td file into Visualizer graphic files CADDS2PVS uses the CAMU database not the _ps file Visualizer and 3D viewer Displays components according to their orientation Visualizer may be used to move them and interface with Life Cycle Application Interface with CAMU Exchange between CAMU database and Product Structure Open
243. ng file with the same root name as an assembly or a part is considered a member of that assembly or part A drawing file that is not associated with a part or assembly file can be stored separately with an object type of PTCDRW The interface consists of four components e Interface binary file ptcarb This component the rulebase executable file gets executed when a Vault command is executed e Support binary file asm2ps This component converts the Pro ENGINEER assembly file to the Product Structure format 12 6 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Understanding the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER e Support binary file ps2attr This component converts the product structure information into the Vault attribute bag e Support binary file extract This component extracts the attribute information from the Vault The store update and replace Commands When you execute a store update or replace command ona Pro ENGINEER generated object the interface e Searches the path specified in the environment variable PROE_PATH if the complete Pro ENGINEER object path is not specified If not found it then searches the current working directory e Stores the object if it exists If the object is an assembly or part and a member drawing file exists the drawing file is stored in the object e Stores the parent child relationship information is stored in the Vault as attributes defining
244. ng with Dual Display This chapter describes the Dual Display feature and explains how to use it e About Dual Display e Using Dual Display EPD Connect User Guide 9 1 Working with Dual Display About Dual Display About Dual Display The Optegra Dual Display feature allows you to view e EPD Connect on one display and EPD Visualizer on the other e CADDS 5i on one display and EPD Connect on the other Dual Display supports Sun Solaris and HP UX under the Common Desktop Environment Please note Dual Display is possible when e Display 1 and Display 2 are running on the same Xserver e Display 1 and Display 2 are connected to the same machine 9 2 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Dual Display Using Dual Display Using Dual Display The VISUALIZER_DISPLAY and CADDS_DISPLAY environment variables allow you to use and control the Optegra Dual Display from the terminal where EPD Connect is invoked The default value for both these environment variables is SDISPLAY of the local machine in SEPD_HOME scripts Connect On starting EPD Visualizer from EPD Connect EPD Visualizer is displayed on the display set by the VISUALIZER_DISPLAY environment variable Similarly on starting CADDS 51 from EPD Connect CADDS 5i is displayed on the display set by the CADDS_DISPLAY environment variable Viewing EPD Connect On One Display and EPD Visualizer On the Other The following table shows the samples of the environme
245. nsfer a message about the operation to EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp communications agent dciepd Please note The Display menu options are available when the tree structure is loaded in EPD Connect The menu is configured by the EPD_TOOLS MENU environment variable The setting of the CVDPA_VIS_NAME and CVDPA_VIS_TARGET environment variables configures DIVISION MockUp as the default visualization tool The communication agent dciepd supports the following functions Interprets incoming and outgoing messages from EPD Connect Sends to and receives appropriate commands from DIVISION MockUp DIVISION MockUp performs the following functions Open a configuration EPD Connect opens a configuration creates a report and exports this report in VDI format to DIVISION MockUp Open a reference EPD Connect opens a referenced configuration creates a report and exports this report in VDI format to DIVISION MockUp Add a component EPD Connect instructs DIVISION MockUp to add a new component to a tree Edit properties EPD Connect instructs DIVISION MockUp to change the name or position of a component Close a configuration Closes the current open configuration Close a reference Closes the referenced configuration Cut a component Cuts components from the tree Paste Pastes a component that you cut or copy to a tree Load Delete Hide and Show Loads deletes hides and shows assemblies respecti
246. nt variable settings for displaying EPD Connect and EPD Visualizer Scenario Display 1 Display 2 Variable Settings EPD Connect and EPD Visualizer EPD Visualizer EPD Connect DISPLAY and CMOM_ DISPLAY are set to with Product lt machine name gt 0 1lor 0 1 Structures CMOM_DOMATIN is set to a user defined value VISUALIZER_ DISPLAY is set to lt machine name gt 0 0o0r 0 0 Viewing CADDS 5i On One Display and EPD Connect On the Other To view CADDS 5i on one display and EPD Connect on the other set the environment variables as follows e Set the CV_PLATFORM environment variable to ogl in the caddsrc local file CADDS 5i and EPD Connect Dual Display is available only in the OpenGL mode e Set the following variables in the caddsrc local file on Solaris 2 8 limit coredumpsize 0 unlimit datasize unlimit stacksize unlimit memorysize unlimit descriptors Please note For HP UX do not set the Limit and unlimit variables in the caddsrc local file as described above EPD Connect User Guide 9 3 Working with Dual Display Using Dual Display e Set the CADDS PICT _ATTR and CADDS DRAW ATTR variable in the caddsrc local file as follows setenv CADDS PICT ATTR Display lt machine name gt 0 1 State normal Retained yes setenv CADDS DRAW ATTR Display lt machine name gt 0 1 State normal Retained yes The following table shows the samples of the environment varia
247. nts from the 3D Viewer Convert Converts parts to graphic files Show Displays components selected or highlighted in the product structure tree Hide Hides components selected or highlighted in the product structure tree Select Selects components selected in the product structure tree Deselect Deselects components selected in the product structure tree Highlight Highlights components highlighted in the product structure tree Transparency Shows components selected or highlighted in the product structure tree as transparent Color Resets the colors of components selected or highlighted in the product structure tree to their original colors Also shows components in indicator colors or sets the color of all components to white Options Instructs the 3D Viewer to display polygons as shell or flat polygons EPD Connect User Guide 5 19 Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Loading Tree Components into the 3D Viewer Load You can load components shown in the product structure tree into the 3D Viewer The Load menu commands are as follows Load Menu Option Action All Load all components in the product structure tree into the 3D Viewer Selected Load components selected in the product structure tree into the 3D Viewer Highlighted Load components highlighted in the product structure tree into the 3D Viewer Only Selected Load components currently selected in the product structure tree and remove
248. o open the files from Database are as follows If the file classification is PUB public a user can display data in the Data Browser and display Vaulted items in the Product Structure window provided the user s data access is at least Read If the file classification is PRO project only users belonging to a project can open the files and display the Vault data in the Product Structure window The users can also view the file information in the Data Browser Users not belonging to the project cannot display the data in the Data Browser If the file classification is PRI private only the owner of a file can open the Vault data in a Product Structure window The owner can also view the file information in the Data Browser The other users cannot display the data in the Data Browser Enabled Disabled STORE _TO NEXT REV If Enabled checks whether the item already exists in the Vault when the Store window opens If the item exists the revision number is automatically incremented Enabled Disabled STORE REV READONLY If Enabled will ensure that the revision field in the Store window is set to Read only Enabled Disabled 4 Enter a Value for the parameter or select Enabled or Disabled 5 Select either a User a Command List of users or a Workstation that the parameters apply to 6 Click Apply to add change or delete the parameters EPD Connect User Guide Appendix C Process F
249. o search The default is 1 5 In the Query Attributes Data field specify whether to retrieve attribute data from the local disk from the Vault or from both 6 Click Where Used to start the search If no revision is specified the search looks for all occurrences of the item The currently displayed tree structure is stored in local memory and replaced in the Product Structure window by a routing tree The routing tree structure shows the component as the root component An attribute quantity is associated with the components in the routing tree This holds a value that defines the number of times the specified item appears in that assembly The new tree shows the component routing from the queried item in reverse Thus each configuration using the item is identified as the lowest subcomponent level on each leg of the new tree structure The original tree can subsequently be retrieved from local memory by choosing File gt Memory sending and Responding to Messages This section explains how to perform the following tasks e Send messages to other Vault users e Read messages sent to you e Respond to messages requiring your response EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Database Menu Options Sending Messages to Other Users To send messages of a general nature to other users follow these steps 1 Choose Database gt Send Messages to open the Send Message dialog box ____ SEND MES
250. ockUp BGF Binary Geometry Files files from the component data that the BGF files are derived from The dvise_epd_rc file is distributed with load method 3 selected To change this default selection comment the lines corresponding to load method 3 and remove the character from the lines corresponding to the required load method Set the load methods setenv CVDPA LOAD METHOD 1 setenv CVDPA_DVISE TYPE bgf setenv CVDPA_LOAD METHOD 2 setenv CVDPA_DVISE TYPE bgf setenv CVDPA LOAD METHOD 3 setenv CVDPA DVISE TYPE pd bgf setenv CVDPA LOAD METHOD 4 setenv CVDPA DVISE TYPE bgf Definition of the load method is available in the perl script open p1 located in EPD_HOME data explorer reports Editing the GO Script To start EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp run the Go script from the DIVISION MockUp installation directory Before running the Go script ensure that the System Administrator edits the Go script for site specific customization or ensure that your EPD Connect environment adopts the commands within the Go script The EPD Connect environment adopts the commands within the Go script by reproducing the commands in the connect script located in the EPD_HOME scripts directory Use the following Go script as a template bin csh f Pick up the environment it s better to source this from login source dvise_epd_re Data specific set these according to point to your data setenv CA _ASSYP
251. ocking Vault Items 7 18 Storing Items in Vault 7 18 Storing a Single Item 7 18 Storing Multiple Items 7 19 Copying Vault Items 7 21 Changing the Attributes of a Vault Item 7 23 Editing Vault Attributes 7 24 Changing the Status or Revision of a Vault Item 7 25 Reviewing Vault Items 7 26 Requesting Reviews 7 26 Requesting a Review of a Single Vault Item 7 27 Requesting a Review of Multiple Vault Items 7 28 Responding to Reviews 7 30 Responding to a Review of a Single Vault Item 7 30 Responding to a Review of Multiple Vault Items 7 32 Working with Distributed Vaults 7 34 Registering Objects 7 34 Unregistering Objects 7 35 EPD Connect User Guide Contents xiii Registering And Unregistering ADRAWs Associated with CAMU Files 7 36 Subscribing Objects 7 37 Unsubscribing Objects 7 40 Distributing Objects 7 40 Listing Information about a Vault Item 7 41 Obtaining Information from the Vault 7 43 Querying Vault Data 7 43 Customizing Query Results 7 46 Saving the Query Results 7 48 Opening a Tree Structure from the Vault 7 48 Working with Vault Data Using the Information Browser__ 7 50 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Overview 8 2 CADDS 5i and Optegra Interoperabilty in Non English Locales __ 8 3 EPD Connect Interface for CADDS 8 4 epdconn ini 8 4 caddsrb ini 8 8 EPD Interface for CADDS Support 8 10 General Process Flow 8 12 Tree Structure and CAM
252. oduct structure tree The length of each component is determined by the length of its attribute text string 5 Click Reset to restore the original settings in this window 6 Click Default to reinstate the default settings 7 Click Clear to clear the current information from all components Click Apply to blank out all the components Please note If more than one Product Structure window with the product structure tree is open the component attribute information is added to all the tree configurations when you specify the required Component Text Display options and click Apply EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Selecting and Displaying Components Setting the Component Text Font You can determine the text font that labels tree components in the Product Structure window Structure Overview window and the Clipboard window The fonts available depend on the platform and graphics window system They are held in a text file on the system To set the font 1 Choose View gt TreeFont Customizer The Tree Font Customizer dialog box opens Tee Pant Castaic o l hette Tant CONN Bt He el r morma 2 1 SC i Min xe UME rer imini 2 Select a font from the list 3 Specify the window to which it applies 4 Click Apply Please note If more than one Product Structure window with the product structure tree is open the text font that you choose is applied to the act
253. omponent selected in the 3D Viewer Figure 5 1 Starting State Product Structure Tree 30 Viewer J al init handle a zeat wheel_i If you apply Select gt Only Selected to this example the handle and seat components are selected in the 3D Viewer and the wheel is deselected The result is shown in the following figure 5 22 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Figure 5 2 Ending State Product Structure Tree 30 Viewer bicycle assy Deselecting Components Deselect You can incrementally deselect components and deselect all components in the 3D Viewer The Deselect menu options are e All Deselects all components currently selected in the 3D Viewer e Selected Deselects components selected in the product structure tree Choose Display gt Deselect gt All to deselect all components selected in the 3D Viewer Incrementally Deselecting Components in the 3D Viewer To incrementally deselect components in the 3D Viewer 1 Select in the product structure tree components you want deselected in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Deselect gt Selected The components you have selected in the product structure tree are deselected in the 3D Viewer Components already selected in the 3D Viewer that are not selected in the structure tree remain selected EPD Connect User Guide 5 23 Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Highlighting Components Highlight You can
254. omponents Sel vs All checks for clashes between the selected components and all the other components Type CADDS Parts GBF Files or GAF Files Type of file upon which you want clash detection performed CADDS part gbf file or gaf file Using Geometry Extents Attr or Extents Geometry uses the tessellation data for the CADDS parts to calculate the clashes This method is the most accurate but gives the worst system performance Extents Attr uses the part extents for all components having an attribute added This method provides both good accuracy and good system performance Extents always uses the part extents This method provides the best system performance but the poorest accuracy Report First Clash or All Clashes First Clash reports only the first calculated clash for a given component All Clashes reports all clashes for a given component 4 Select the required configurations from the Active Configurations list The Active Configurations list displays the names of the active configurations in all the Product Structure windows The current working configuration is selected in the list by default To select all the configurations click the All option Please note Ensure that you perform clash detection on saved product structures 5 Click Apply to perform the clash detection based on your selections Click Cancel to cancel and exit from clash detection 6 4 EPD Connect User Guide
255. on Allegro Cadence and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence Design Systems Inc AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes COACH is a trademark of CADTRAIN Inc DOORS is a registered trademark of Telelogic AB FLEX m is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software Inc Geomagic is a registered trademark of Raindrop Geomagic Inc EVERSYNC GROOVE GROOVEFEST GROOVE NET GROOVE NETWORKS iGROOVE PEERWARE and the interlocking circles logo are trademarks of Groove Networks Inc Helix is a trademark of Microcadam Inc HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft America Inc HP UX is a registered trademark and Tru64 is a trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company I DEAS Metaphase Parasolid SHERPA Solid Edge and Unigraphics are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation EDS InstallShield is a registered trademark and service mark of InstallShield Software Corporation in the United States and or other countries Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc MatrixOne is a trademark of MatrixOne Inc Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design AMPLE and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation Netscape and the Netscape N and Ship s Wheel logos are registered trademarks of
256. on refer to the Status and Report Windows on page 2 33 8 Perform one of the following tasks to get the results e Click compare to compare the specified product structure trees e Click Clear to clear the dialog e Click Apply to process the request that you have submitted e Click Reset to reset the property sheet and negate the requests that you have submitted since opening the property sheet e Click Cancel to close the property sheet 2 26 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Comparing Two Trees 9 Choose Window gt Component Status to view the information statistically See Component Status on page 2 35 for a description of the fields in the Component Status window Please note You can display a maximum of four Product Structure windows with product structure trees and compare the active product structure tree component with the tree component that is stored in memory The attributes for comparison are dynamically populated when you change to another Product Structure window EPD Connect User Guide 2 27 Using the Product Structure Window Comparing Two Trees Obtaining a Comparison Report Report options are displayed in the Report field at the bottom of the Configuration Compare Rules dialog box These options customize reports To obtain a comparison report 1 Define the comparison rules as directed in the previous section 2 Select the type of report from t
257. on and zoning capabilities The following topics are discussed e Detecting Clashes e Zoning EPD Connect User Guide 6 1 Clash Detection and Zoning Detecting Clashes Detecting Clashes Clash detection allows you to compute in batch mode the components from a selection made in the product structure that clash each other The input data is as follows e Tessellation data associated to a model e Component orientation from the product structure The symmetry flag of each instance if defined is used to mirror the tessellation data Clash detection routine transforms the tessellation data according to the specified orientation data associated to the selected components You can interrogate the system on the proximity of parts and components by performing clash detection on them There are two types of clash detections e Hard clash Calculates the physical clashes between selected components e Soft clash Detects the clearance between components and is useful for determining clearance fits between components 6 2 EPD Connect User Guide Clash Detection and Zoning Detecting Clashes Clash Detection in the Foreground Mode To perform clash detection do the following 1 Select the components in the active product structure tree or the active product structure tree on which you want to perform a clash detection 2 Choose Tools gt Clash Detection The Interference Detection dialog box opens
258. on java Copyright 1996 97 Mattias L Jugel Marcus Mei ner is redistributed under the GNU General Public License This license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at http www mud de se jta for a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution by sending an e mail to leo mud de or marcus mud de you are allowed to choose either distribution method The source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License GTK The GIMP Toolkit are licensed under the GNU LPGL You may obtain a copy of the source code at http www gtk org which is likewise provided under the GNU LPGL UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software pursuant to FAR 12 212 a b OCT 95 or DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a JUN 95 is provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only For procurements predating the above clauses use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 OCT 88 or Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 JUN 87 as applicable 110102
259. on objects 2 Choose Interference gt Control from the EPD Visualizer window to set up the interference checking session The Interference Checking Control window opens 3 Choose the Highlight in Navigator option to highlight the application objects that are clashing in EPD Connect Please note When you set the environment variable PVS_SHOW_ZONE in SEPD HOME data reposit explorer ini and choose the Highlight in Navigator option all of the application objects that are not completely within the boundaries of the zone and that do not clash with the zone boundaries are hidden EPD Connect User Guide 15 9 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Setting up AEC Support for EPD Connect setting up AEC Support for EPD Connect To extract the AEC attributes to EPD Connect a specific setup is required on the AEC servers that are connected to EPD Connect The setup involves running the inst_prop_filt p1 script on the AEC server This script uses the aec2ps_propdef ini file as the input file The data in this file is added to the AEC_PROPERTY_DICTIONARY_TBL or any other equivalent AEC table that is used The entries in the AEC_PROPERTY_DICTIONARY_TBL or the selected AEC table are used to filter the attributes extracted to EPD Connect globally You can use any file as an input file that matches the format listed in the aec2ps_ propdef ini file The default file will export all the attributes for the Piping application object
260. or more information on the processing phases refer to Processing Phases on page C 3 12 8 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Working in EPD Connect Working in EPD Connect Using EPD Connect you can execute Vault commands on Pro ENGINEER objects such as assemblies parts drawings and layouts EPD Connect does the following Lists Pro ENGINEER objects located on the local disk and in the Vault Allows you to transfer data between the local disk and the Vault Provides product structure browsing for assemblies Provides database management for structuring and accessing information Lets you add Pro ENGINEER objects to product structures Working with the Information Browser To work with the Information Browser and the Product Structure window 1 2 Choose the Structure tab of the Information Browser To open a Pro ENGINEER assembly in a product structure choose File gt Open The Open Configuration dialog box opens To open an existing Pro ENGINEER assembly in the Application field specify PTCASM Its location can be either Local Disk or Database Click Query for the list of available assemblies Click Open to load the assembly To perform Vault operations on selected components choose a Vault transfer command by choosing Database gt Vault Please note Modifications made to the product structure using EPD Connect are not stored in the Pro ENGINEER assembly E
261. or temporary files usually usr tmp nav dvtemp DVISE_CONV_CV_NAME dvise epd rec The name of the DIVISION MockUp geometry converter for CADDS cv2vdi Do not modify DVISE_CONV_PD OPT dvise epd rec Options for the CADDS converter DVISE_CONV_CAT NAME dvise epd rec The name of the DIVISION MockUp geometry converter for CATIA Cat ia2vd1 Do not modify DVISE_CONV_CAT OPT dvise epd rec Options for the CATIA converter DIVISIONPATH GO The search path for DIVISION MockUp This path must identify the location of the BGF geometry files and must generally mirror CVPATH EPD Connect User Guide 10 9 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Environment Variables Variable Where Used Meaning DIVISIONROOT dvise_epd_rc The DIVISION MockUp installation directory DV_PDM SAVE ATTRS dvise_epd_rc Forces DIVISION MockUp to save attribute files rather than VDI files DV_NOASSEMBLY VIEW dvise_epd_rc Disables DIVISION MockUp Assembly Manager DV_FILECACHE MODE dvise_epd_rc Disables DIVISION MockUp file caching The value 0 offers better performance in EPD scenarios DVISE TEMPLATE dvise_epd_rc Specifies a template VDI file that is added to all VDI files that are exported to DIVISION MockUp 10 10 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Files
262. orbit the camera position to the left around the vertical axis of the 3D scene Orbit Right enables you to orbit the camera position to the right around the vertical axis of the 3D scene Orbit Over enables you to orbit the camera position over the vertical axis of the 3D scene Orbit Under enables you to orbit the camera position under the vertical axis of the 3D scene Moving the Camera in a Linear Direction The move tools enable you to move the camera position in a linear direction Set the number of units that the camera position moves using the Move Distance slider scale For more details on setting units see Setting the Working Units on page 5 15 The move tools are Move Up enables you to move the 3D scene up relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Move Down enables you to move the 3D scene down relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Move Left enables you to move the 3D scene left relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Move Right enables you to move the 3D scene right relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window EPD Connect User Guide 5 13 Using the 3D Viewer Moving the Camera Move Forward enables you to move the 3D scene forward relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window If you move beyond the camera target a new camera target is automatically set Move Back enables you to move the 3D scene back relativ
263. orking with the STEP interface in EPD Connect Chapter 14 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Working with AEC applications in EPD Connect Chapter 15 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Using the Single tree feature in EPD Connect Appendix A Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Administering Vault application definitions Appendix B Options for System Administrators Process Flow for the EPD Interface Commands Appendix C Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 2 Using the Product Structure Window This chapter describes the Product Structure window and explains how to use it Product Structure Window Using the Product Structure Window Creating a New Product Structure Tree Opening a Product Structure Tree Working with Four Product Structure Windows Hiding Selected or Highlighted Components Editing Component Attributes Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation Comparing Two Trees Saving and Closing a Product Structure Tree Status and Report Windows Working with Multiple CVPATHS Printing and Displaying Reports Printing Product Structures Plotting a Tree Structure Launching Applications from Product Structure Components EPD Connect User Guide 2 1 Using the Product Structure Window Product Structure Window Product Structure Window The Product Structure wi
264. ormity of attribute names across all the installations Any other value other than the above mentioned values is assigned the default value 1 AEC2PS PIPING ELEM TEXT S ELT NAME AEC2PS HVAC_ELEM TEXT SELT NAME AEC2PS CABLE TEXT AEC2PS SEG TEXT AEC2PS NODE TEXT AEC2PS DEVICE TEXT AEC2PS SUPPORT TEXT AEC2PS PLATE TEXT AEC2PS STIFFNER_TEXT AEC2PS WELD TEXT AEC2PS FLANGE TEXT 15 14 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model AEC2PS GENERIC TEXT AEC2PS_ BRACKET TEXT AEC2PS COLLAR TEXT AEC2PS FLANGED PLATE TEXT AEC2PS FOLDED FLANGE TEXT AEC2PS WELDED FLANGE TEXT The settings that determine the customized class names for the various classes of nodes The sign is prefixed to all the attribute names The attribute values can be separated by a single character of your choice Use quotes with the values that are prefixed by the sign e AEC2PS INDENT PREFIX 1 The setting for enabling or disabling the object name specific prefix for the class names The default value is 1 which enables the prefix identifier setting The value 0 disables the setting e AEC2PS REF SUFFIX Ref The setting for choosing the suffix that is to be appended to the class name of the reference nodes e AEC2PS LOGFILE SEPD TEMP aec2ps log The name of the file where the log messages are written when AEC2PS_ DEBUG
265. p that allows various tree operations to be communicated between them These operations include sub assembly positioning and control of part loading File Edit Visualizer Display Highlight File Edit Selected Window Tools dceiepd For information about various functions of the EPD Connect interface for DIVISION MockUp refer Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp on page 10 14 EPD Connect dV ISE Features With DIVISION MockUp you can do the following e Conduct design reviews e Create product presentations e Explode the assembly dynamically e Quickly retrieve large assemblies 10 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Overview e Quickly browse the 3D graphics of large assemblies that would otherwise require more powerful hardware e Perform realtime visual model inspection e Access the product structure and parameters Please note You cannot have another viewer running in the same environment because DIVISION MockUp is a switchable viewer EPD Connect User Guide 10 3 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Setting the User Environment setting the User Environment Repeat the following procedure for all users of EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp Identifying the Load Method The following extract of the dvise_epd_rc file identifies the preferred load method This extract tells EPD Connect how to derive the name of DIVISION M
266. parts usr apl edm parts read 2 40 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Working with Multiple CVPATHS selecting a CVPATH To select a CVPATH from the currently available CVPATHs 1 Choose File gt Select CVPATH The Select CVPATH dialog box opens Please note You cannot access the above option when there is an active tree in the Product Structure window CVPATH C PATHENG INES C PATHCARS Apply Edit Cancel 2 Select an item from the list of CVPATHSs and click Apply The selected CVPATH variable is used for the entire session You can also trace the currently active CVPATH from the Session Properties window on the EPD Connect menu bar EPD Connect User Guide 2 41 Using the Product Structure Window Working with Multiple CVPATHS Editing a CVPATH To edit a selected CVPATH 1 Select an item from the CVPATH list that appears in the Select CVPATH dialog box 2 Click Edit The Edit Selected CVPATH dialog box opens All the current directories in the selected CVPATH are displayed Selected CYPATH Hame CVPATH usr 1 kahaswad tpsi fuserskKnahasuad create C fusers kKmhasuad parts e Delete Change we Add After we Hove Up we Add Before we Hove Down Add Dir users knhaswad parts carparts Apply Reset Cancel 2 42 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Working with Multiple CVPATHS 3 Choose one of the follow
267. ponding to review 7 30 Store 7 18 Soft clash detection 6 6 Software operation 11 6 Sorting Components 3 14 Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data STEP interface 14 1 Status and Report windows 2 33 ADRAW status 2 37 Component Comparison status 2 36 Component Status 2 35 Session Summary 2 33 Status deferred 7 9 STEP interface 3D Viewer 14 6 CAMU 14 11 Converting to and from CADDS 14 8 14 9 Creating output 14 7 14 8 Displaying files and folders 14 4 EPD Visualizer 14 6 File attributes 14 12 Opening product structures 14 4 Reports 14 12 Vault 14 12 Viewing geometry 14 6 Store Multiple Vault items Multiple Vault items Store 7 19 Single Vault item 7 18 Vault items 7 18 Storing product structure tree 2 23 Structure Window 2 3 Subscribe 7 37 Subscribing objects Vault menu 7 37 Summary Session 2 33 Swap components 3 12 Switch DOD B 9 System attributes 7 21 Case sensitivity B 5 1 Template Visibility rules 4 16 text in Product Structure window 4 3 This 1 1 TIM components 2 11 Comparing 2 29 Exporting 8 22 Importing 8 22 Opening 2 11 EPD Connect User Guide Index 7 Index Saving 2 31 Updating 8 23 Verifying 8 23 TIM parts and assemblies 8 24 Update 8 23 Verify 8 23 Tool menu Class Detection 6 2 Zones 6 7 Toolbar Default functions 2 5 Product Structure window 2 4 Topology Bus 1 17 Trace Selected View menu 4 30 Transfer Requests Window menu 7 8 Translated Image Models 1 17
268. ponse EPD Connect User Guide 7 31 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Responding to a Review of Multiple Vault Items Respond to the review of multiple Vault items that is a set of files as follows 1 You can respond to the review request in one of the following ways a Select the Vault items Perform one of the following actions In the Data Browser select the Vault items that are in the In Review state In the Product Structure window select the nodes that are in the In Review state b Choose Database gt Vault gt Respond to Review Please note If you select Vault items that belong to different review filesets you can approve or reject all the items from the different filesets together as shown in Figure 7 5 OR a Choose Database gt Read Messages b Click Respond 7 32 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 2 The Respond to a Review dialog box opens e The name revision and the application of the filesets are displayed in the left panel e The name revision and the application of the items in each fileset are displayed in the right panel Figure 7 5 Respond to Review Dialog Box for Multiple Vault Items nr dente Respond to a ES e e Ar e E E E MOBJREQRY_43053APR20011 20412 n2426001 55415001 72911001 82254 CAML DEFAULT COKPL ETE EXPLODED GooD1 GOODMUL1 The component placement in EXPLODED is still nat to my
269. pplications B 2 Defining Applications B 5 Setting Application Project Relationships B 8 Switching the DOD B 9 Making the Switch B 10 Setting Interface Preferences for Users B 11 EPD Connect User Guide Contents xix Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Introduction C 2 Processing Phases C 3 Phase Initial Processing C 3 Phase Il Execution C 3 Phase Ill Cleanup C 3 Locating Objects for Vault Commands C 5 STORE C 5 GET C 5 READ C 6 Contents xx EPD Connect User Guide Preface EPD Connect User Guide provides the EPD Connect users with a detailed overview of the capabilties of EPD Connect and the specific procedures required in order to accomplish the following tasks Create edit and view product structure trees and their component attributes Display the three dimensional geometry of any component Access company supplier or personel information that is pertinent to job responsibilities Optional EPD Connect add ons provide the following additional capabilities Monitor the progress of work processes being followed by members of the product development team Work with the design application being used to develop a product Perform configuration management tasks Display product parts and assemblies Related Documents The following documents may be helpful as you use EPD Connect User Guide AccessWare User Guide Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Ref
270. pplies transparency to the components highlighted in the product structure tree Resetting Colors Color To reset the colors of the components in the 3D Viewer choose one of the following Reset Color commands Menu Command Action Reset All Resets the colors of all components in the 3D Viewer to their original colors Reset Selected Resets the colors of all components selected in the product structure tree to their original colors in the 3D Viewer Reset Highlighted Resets the colors of all components highlighted in the product structure tree to their original colors in the 3D Viewer From Indicators Shows components in the 3D Viewer in indicator colors To activate indicator colors you must choose View gt ACCess from the product structure menu and adjust the selections on the Access dialog box See the Product Structure User Guide for instructions on how to set up the Access dialog box All White Sets the color of all components in the 3D Viewer to white before using Highlight and Transparency options to make highlighted and transparent components easier to see EPD Connect User Guide 5 25 Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Please note If you choose Color gt All White before using the highlight and transparency options you will more easily see the highlighted red components in the 3D Viewer Displaying Polygons Options You can display polygons as
271. previously loaded components Only Highlighted Load components currently highlighted in the product structure tree and remove previously loaded components Deleting Components from the 3D Viewer Delete You can delete the components in the product structure tree from the 3D Viewer The Delete menu commands are Delete Menu Option Action All Delete all displayed components from the 3D Viewer This provides a fresh display window into which components can be loaded Selected Delete all components that correspond to the selected components in the product structure tree Highlighted Delete all components that correspond to the highlighted components in the product structure tree Converting CADDS Parts to Graphic Files Convert You can convert CADDS parts to graphic ASCII or graphic binary gbf files and then perform operations on them in the 3D Viewer The Conversion menu commands for converting CADDS parts to graphic files are Convert Menu Option Action All Convert all parts to graphic files Selected Convert selected parts to graphic files Highlighted Convert highlighted parts to graphic files 5 20 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu showing Components Show The options for displaying components affect only the 3D Viewer and its data state The Show menu options are Show Menu Option Action All Displa
272. rated by an underscore _ 6 Enter a group name in the Group field LINK is the standard attribute group that is available in the drop down list All the attributes are unique based on their name and type Attributes can also have a group name which is optional that makes them unique Namely the same attribute can exist in different groups EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Setting Global Attributes If you are working with reference assemblies all the attributes that belong to the group LINK are available even after the assemblies are expanded 7 Click OK to make the changes Copying Instance Attributes You can specify whether the instance attributes must be copied to the new instance that you have created during the copy and paste operations by setting values to the variable CA_COPY_INSTANCE_ATTR as shown below e If the value of this variable is set to 0 instance attributes are not copied to the new instance This is the default e If the value of this variable is set to 1 instance attributes are copied to the new instance EPD Connect User Guide 3 17 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Setting Revision Levels setting Revision Levels You can set or change the revision levels of a component reference Setting Revision Levels of a Component You can set the revision level of a component reference on the product structure tree to agree with the revision le
273. ration has been processed an Audit Transaction Log window opens if any items were not stored during the store operation Constraints Storing multiple items has the following constraints e Items with user defined noneditable attributes will not be stored during a multiple store operation 7 20 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options e If an item with editable attributes is selected the Edit Attributes window opens You can edit these attributes These editable attributes are applied to all selected objects e Ifa revision is not specified all items are stored with revision 1 However the store operation for an item fails if it is already present in the Vault with the same revision e Ifarevision is specified all items are stored only when the following conditions are satisfied e The item is not already present with the given revision in Vault e All previous revisions of the items are in the released status e There are no higher revisions of any one item in Vault e The values of the following attributes are applied to all selected items e The Application Class Status and System Code values e The values of the system attributes The system attributes are System Type Description Group Technology Code User defined Type and Part Number Copying Vault Items To copy a Vault item 1 Select the item that you want to copy 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Copy The Copy
274. ree along with the application objects e After exploring the product structure all the relevant AEC application objects are listed These include some entities that are not a part of the visualization database The Display menu operations on such objects will have no effect on the visualization applications e The display menu options can be used for objects that are present both in the AEC as well as the visualization database 15 6 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Working with 3D Viewer Working with 3D Viewer To display the hierarchy of the application objects using a 3D Viewer 1 2 Start EPD Connect Select the CADDS model in the Product Structure window and explore it as explained in Working with Application Objects in the Product Structure Window on page 15 5 Choose Tools gt 3D Viewer from the EPD Connect menu bar View the model in the 3D Viewer Click the icon for selecting masks in the 3D Viewer window Choose the Graphics File option to select the required CADDS component in the 3D Viewer The associated CADDS component can be selected and scrolled in the product structure window Choose the Item option to select a required application object in the 3D Viewer The associated application objects can be selected and scrolled in the product structure window EPD Connect User Guide 15 7 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect
275. res You can combine STEP file product structures and components as you would any other product structures and components 14 6 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Creating STEP Output Creating STEP Output To save all or part of a STEP product structure as another STEP file and with the product structure active 1 Choose File gt Export The Export Structure dialog box opens SAT OTe Hamz Fareaipgdier Hh E d Det ory Ofc ef Read s Olher Hague TAB s I l Yamma A ur s Hu Hreirr al Andree we splined s AL hind aml LH AUnlalk mdy we A P D daa bebe Cuncha ba lapidyhbil irks by are Coed 2 In the Name field enter the name of the exported file 3 In the Export to field choose STEP 4 For Directory click Create and enter the directory 5 For Overwrite click Yes 6 For Nodes click All or Selected To save the entire tree click All Otherwise select the components you want to save and click Selected 7 For Options click the type of data to export e Structure and CM Attributes only A STEP file is created containing only product structure and attributes compliant with Conformance Class 1 of STEP AP203 e All AP 203 data A STEP file is created containing product structure attributes and geometry Saving all AP 203 data can be time consuming if the structure s geometry is complex e Include Geometry for highlighted nodes only A STE
276. reset all components displayed in the 3D Viewer to their original color and highlight in red the components selected in the product structure tree 1 In the product structure tree select only the components you want to see highlighted in the 3D Viewer 2 Choose Display gt Highlight gt Only Selected The selected components are highlighted in the 3D Viewer 5 24 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Display Menu Highlighting Only Highlighted Components You can reset all components displayed in the 3D Viewer to their original color and highlight in red only the components highlighted in the product structure tree To do this choose Display gt Highlight gt Only Highlighted Applying Transparency Transparency To apply transparency to the components in the 3D Viewer select from the following commands Menu Command Action Selected Shows components selected in the product structure tree as transparent in the 3D Viewer but leaves the appearance of other components unchanged Highlighted Shows components highlighted in the product structure tree as transparent in the 3D Viewer but leaves the appearance of other components unchanged Only Selected Resets all components in the 3D Viewer to their original color and applies transparency to the components selected in the product structure tree Only Highlighted Resets all components in the 3D Viewer to their original color and a
277. resource viewswitch r Resource file of Set 3D Viewer dialog box data help C ca_vsw hlp Help file for Set 3D Viewer Selection dialog box data explorer reports startdvise pl Script to launch DIVISION MockUp data explorer reports upddvise pl Updates the tree in DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect User Guide 10 11 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp DIVISION MockUp Triggers DIVISION MockUp Triggers The following table lists the triggers that are available with DIVISION MockUp File Usage data trigger tree addcomp Tells DIVISION MockUp to add a component data trigger tree closeconf Tells DIVISION MockUp to close configuration data trigger tree closevis Tells DIVISION MockUp to quit data trigger tree cutcomp Tells DIVISION MockUp to remove a tree node data trigger tree editprop Tells DIVISION MockUp to update position orientation and name data trigger tree openconft Tells DIVISION MockUp to open a tree data trigger tree pre open Tells DIVISION MockUp to perform activities before opening the tree in EPD Connect data trigger tree refindex Tells DIVISION MockUp to update tree when EPD Connect refindex changes 10 12 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp System Requirements system Requirements DIVISION MockUp has a number of system requirements For
278. rmation related to the assembly Explore Object Explores the CADDS model and displays the hierarchy and the attributes of the application objects Close Object Closes the explored CADDS model Topology Bus gt Import Imports a Pro ENGINEER part or assembly and creates a CADDS5 TIM See Importing Pro ENGINEER Parts and Assemblies on page 8 22 Topology Bus gt Export Exports a CADDS 5 part or assembly and creates a Pro ENGINEER TIM See Exporting CADDS 5 Parts and Assemblies on page 8 22 Topology Bus gt Verify Verifies a CADDS 5 or Pro ENGINEER TIM See Verifying TIM Parts and Assemblies on page 8 23 Topology Bus gt Update Updates a CADDS 5 or Pro ENGINEER TIM See Updating TIM Parts and Assemblies on page 8 23 Exit Closes the EPD Connect session EPD Connect User Guide 8 27 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab Filing an Assembly You can file the active assembly file by choosing File gt Assembly For information on how this applies to CADDS CAMU see Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Filing an Assembly with Options You can file the active assembly file using options such as new name and application type by choosing File gt Assembly with Options For information on how this applies to CADDS CAMU see Concurrent Assembly Mock Up User Guide and Menu Reference Quitting Suspended
279. ructure window The Item Properties window opens V v canos E 3 Click Application in the Associated Item field if the component is associated with an application Select an application from the drop down list The application can now be launched directly from the Product Structure window EPD Connect User Guide 2 19 Using the Product Structure Window Editing Component Attributes 4 Enter the Item Name and Revision of the component if you have specified an Application 5 Specify a geometric Orientation for the components e Specify X Y and Z values for the location of the origin e Specify ANGX ANGY or ANGZ for its orientation in space e Specify the translational units as millimeters MM centimeters CM meters M or inches IN The default is centimeters The system converts one unit of measurement to the required units and displays it e Specify the angle of rotation in degrees or radians e Click the scope of the orientation as follows Options Description Local Specifies the orientation relative to the item s parent orientation Global Specifies the orientation relative to the assembly s global origin Please note Geometric orientation values are supported at locales where the decimal seperator is a comma For example in the French Locale values with a comma as the decimal seperator are correctly converted to the client s locale during get or read Vault operations
280. rule 4 Click Apply to change the rule and to display the modified version in the display list 5 Click Access to make the change on the component tree Deleting a Rule To delete an existing rule 1 Select the rule from the data display list 2 In the Action field select Delete 3 Click Apply 4 Click Reset to clear all the rules in the list Selecting Components by the Access Indicator To select all product structure components with the same access indicator 1 Choose View gt Select gt Color The Color Selection dialog box opens 1 mi si _4 5 s a a i POP JEO al 2 Click the color you would like to select in the product structure 3 Click OK All components with the same access indicator are selected EPD Connect User Guide 4 9 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules Creating Highlighting Rules You can define highlighting rules that determine which components are highlighted on the currently displayed component tree For each rule you can define one or more attribute characteristics as selection criteria All tree components sharing common characteristics are highlighted with a colored box outline The default highlight color is red To define a new highlighting rule follow these steps 1 Choose View gt Highlight to open the Highlight Rules window The current highlighting rules are listed in the display area at the top of the w
281. rwrite click Yes 14 8 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Creating STEP Output 6 For Nodes click A11 or Selected To save the entire tree click A11 Otherwise select the components you want to save and click Selected 7 For Options click the type of data to export Structure and CM Attributes only Only the product structure file is created Component nodes are converted to the item type CADDS No geometry is converted All AP 203 data Geometry information in STEP is processed into CADDS native format A product structure file is created whose component nodes are of the item type CADDS Each node is associated with a newly created CADDS file Saving all AP 203 data can be time consuming if the structure s geometry is complex CADDS Conversion for highlighted nodes only The selected product structure is processed but geometry is converted to CADDS native format only for highlighted nodes This option may save time if the structure s geometry is complex and you want to convert only certain nodes You cannot save multiple independent components or subassemblies to one CADDS file The following methods are useful when you save a product structure e Add the corresponding trace links by choosing View gt Link gt Selected to automatically select the required trace links e Copy the chosen components to a new structure and save it as a STEP file EPD Connec
282. ry using CADDS CAMU Pro ENGINEER MEDUSA CATIA or AutoCAD e Store retrieve and replace assembly files using the interface to Vault EPD Connect User Guide 1 11 EPD Connect Overview EPD Connect Components Data Browser The Data Browser allows you to transfer data between the local disk and the Vault You can search and list information in the Data Browser without opening a configuration tree in the Product Structure window Data Browser NAHE REVISION STATUS SYSCIME OWNER TIPE USERID DOOR 1 Iv OLETEST BS A 10000 1 Iw PERFTEST BS 10001 1 Iw PERFTEST BS LOOK 1 Iv PERFTIEST BS 10003 i IV PERFIEST BS 1000 1 Iy PERFTEST PS 10005 1 IF PERFIEST Fo Lotte 1 IY PERFTEST PS LODO 1 Iw PERFTEST BS LOO 1 IV PERFTEST BS 10009 1 IV PERFTEST BS 10010 1 IY PERFIEST BS 10011 1 IV PERFTEST PS 10012 1 Iv PERFTEST BS 10013 1 Iu PERFTEST BS LOO 1 Iv PERFTEST BS 10015 1 Iv EERFTEST ES 10016 1 IW PERFTEST BS 10017 1 Iv PERFTEST BS T pe y I I i O Swe w You can open the Data Browser window along with the Product Structure window and work interactively with the files and the tree structure 3 Dimensional Viewer The 3 Dimensional Viewer allows you to e Visualize the tessellated files that you create with 3 Dimensional CAD systems e Perform tasks upon the graphical depiction of the product represented in the hierarchical view of the product Use the viewer to display the product represented in the hier
283. s 15 10 EPD Connect User Guide Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Correlating AEC Objects with Visualization Applications Correlating AEC Objects with Visualization Applications The EPD interface for the AEC application objects uses the both the partid of the CADDS part and the CADDSUID of the objects within the CADDS part to uniquely identify the application objects in EPD Connect Visualizer and 3D Viewer The partid of the CADDS part is set using the SELECT and LINK ADBMS commands of CADDS In case you want to keep the CADDS session alive while working with this interface use the FILE PART command after running the LINK ADBMS command This ensures that the partid matches for the AEC database and the Visualization database EPD Connect User Guide 15 11 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Generating Reference Nodes for Application Objects Generating Reference Nodes for Application Objects You can use reference nodes to display relationships between the various application objects that are not a part of the hierarchical model being used for generating the product structure tree For example consider a weld that refers to two plates These two plates can be treated as reference nodes of the weld These plates will also be a part of the product structure tree under the generic name plate Working with ASM Objects You can display reference relationships between the ASM appli
284. s Indicator 4 9 Creating Highlighting Rules 4 10 Highlighting by Value 4 11 EPD Connect User Guide Contents ix Highlighting by Attribute 4 12 Creating Display Rules 4 14 Example 4 16 Creating a Display Rules Template 4 16 Retrieving a Template 4 18 Defining the Display State for TIM Components 4 19 Saving Display States 4 20 Restoring Display States 4 21 Compressing a Display Structure 4 22 Uncompressed Node 4 22 Compressed Node 4 23 Example Screws in an Assembly 4 24 Advantages 4 24 Limitations 4 24 Global Renumbering of Nodes 4 25 Renumbering Nodes of All Classes 4 25 Renumbering Nodes of a Specific Class 4 25 Browsing for Components 4 26 Creating and Clearing Display Conditions 4 29 View Menu 4 29 Clear Menu 4 31 Using the 3D Viewer About 3D Viewer 5 2 Mouse Behavior 5 2 3D Viewer Operations 5 2 Setting the Viewer Session 5 4 Creating a New Session 5 4 Opening a Graphics File from the 3D Viewer 5 4 Opening a Graphics File from the Product Structure Window ___ 5 5 Setting the View 5 6 Contents x EPD Connect User Guide Resetting the Primary View 5 6 Setting a New Primary View 5 6 Viewing All Components 5 6 Zooming 5 6 Setting the Camera 5 7 Setting the Camera Position 5 7 Setting the Camera Target 5 7 Setting the
285. s always Paths and variables cannot be mixed In Read Directory specify the location where files will be located when retrieved for read operations This may be either the exact directory path or an environment variable setting The first character of environment variable is always Paths and variables cannot be mixed In ViewName specify either CA_FILE DIRECTORY CA_PART_ DIRECTORY or the name of an Oracle table with a similar definition In AM ViewName specify either CA_FILEATTRIBUTES or CA_PARTATTRIBUTES or the name of an Oracle table with a similar definition For Rulebase select an option Option Condition for Selecting Option Yes If EPD Connect must resort to an external rulebase binary file to interpret the application data This is the case for all new applications EPD Connect only recognizes rulebases for PS CADDS and CAMU files No If EPD Connect recognizes the rulebase used to interpret application data This is the case for PS CADDS and CAMU 9 For Structure select an option Option Condition for Selecting Option Yes If the application files are linked in a hierarchical structure If they are you must provide a binary file that defines the structure For example CAMU parts are structures No If the application files are not linked in a hierarchical structure For example CADDS files are not structures 10 For Part select an option Opt
286. s and proprietary information and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium disclosed to third parties or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary Advanced Surface Design CADDS Computervision Computervision Services Electronic Product Definition EPD EPD Connect Expert Machinist Flexible Engineering HARNESSDESIGN Info Engine InPart Optegra Parametric Technology Parametric Technology Corporation PHOTORENDER Pro DESKTOP Pro E Pro ENGINEER Pro HELP Pro INTRALINK Pro MECHANICA Pro TOOLKIT PTC PT Products Shaping Innovation and Windchill Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary 3DPAINT Associative Topology Bus Behavioral Modeling CDRS CounterPart Create Collaborate Control CV CVact CVaec CVdesign CV DORS CVMAC CVNC CVToolmaker DataDoctor DesignSuite DIMENSION III DIVISION DVS DVSAFEWORK EDE e ENGINEER Electrical Design Entry EMX eNC Explorer Expert MoldBase Expert Toolmaker GRANITE ISSM KDiP Knowledge Discipline in Practice Knowledge System Driver ModelCHECK MoldShop NC Builder PartSpeak Pro ANIMATE Pro ASSEMBLY Pro CABLING
287. s are actually more than one but are shown as one in the product structure If add component is performed on leaf nodes it will be applied on all the nodes and they lose the status of leaf nodes get uncompressed automatically and show the added component for all the nodes Figure 3 1 Product Structure with node ref_node_1 compressed For example if you add screw node to refsubnodes_1 3 in the above figure all refsubnodes get uncompresses automatically as they are no longer end nodes Add component is performed on all these nodes as shown in the following figure EPD Connect User Guide 3 7 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Adding Components Figure 3 2 Add component performed on compressed nodes Adding TIM Components When you add a component that has CADDS or CAMU application objects associated with its nodes the TIM information is extracted from the corresponding CADDS CAMU object and added to the component If the node associated with the component is a TIM assembly it is marked with the prefix T If the node is a TIM part it is displayed with the color that is defined using the variable CA_ TIM_NODE COLOR 3 8 EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the Tree Structure Editing the Tree Structure To change the structure or hierarchy of a product structure tree you can cut copy and paste components as required You can also swap or reorder componen
288. s to CADDS Files Converting CADDS Files to STEP Files Converting STEP Files to CAMU Assemblies Performing EPD Connect Actions on STEP Files Reviewing STEP File Attributes and Component Status Generating Reports Working with STEP Data in the Vault Limitations 13 5 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 7 13 7 13 8 13 8 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 4 14 6 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 8 14 10 14 11 14 11 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 13 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Overview Features Limitations 15 2 15 3 15 4 Contents xviii EPD Connect User Guide Working with Application Objects in the Product Structure Window 15 5 Working with 3D Viewer 15 7 Working with EPD Visualizer 15 8 Detecting Clashes 15 9 Setting up AEC Support for EPD Connect 15 10 Correlating AEC Objects with Visualization Applications _ _ _ 15 1 Generating Reference Nodes for Application Objects_ 15 12 Working with ASM Objects 15 12 Working with AEC Cable Objects 15 12 Generating Reports for Reference Nodes 15 12 Using aec2ps on a CADDS Model 15 13 aec2ps ini 15 13 Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Overview A 2 Features A 3 Generating and Activating a Single DB A 4 Reading Orientations from CAMU A 7 Limitations and Restrictions A 9 Options for System Administrators Creating Environments for A
289. s window Click the Render icon The Render Controls dialog box opens Render Controls Rerndernng blelhuds Back Farny Pulygurs Displa f Wire Frame hra piy Remove sf Hidden Line Hat Shading Display Buffering z Smooth Shading Single a Double Apply Cancel Rendering Methods The following rendering methods are available to enable you to generate a realistic 3D scene e Wire Frame Displays all surface edges of the 3D scene as lines regardless of the visibility of the lines e Hidden Line Displays a solid view of the 3D scene with black polygon edges e Flat Shading Displays a shaded solid view of the 3D scene with the edges between the polygons visible e Smooth Shading Displays a smooth shaded solid view of the 3D scene Polygons that are defined as shells in the graphic files are displayed so that you do not see the edges between them 5 10 EPD Connect User Guide Using the 3D Viewer Rendering Back Facing Polygons Specify the display or removal of back facing polygons e Display Includes the polygons facing the back in the display e Remove Removes from the display polygons facing the back that you normally cannot see Please note The removal of back facing polygons works well when the objects are completely closed However if objects contain holes or openings the back facing polygons that you ordinarily see through the openings are invisible
290. section describes the Vault commands and their functions STORE The local object to be stored is located by the interface as follows 1 If the local file name contains a fully qualified path the interface verifies that the object exists If the object is identified then no search is required 2 If the object is not identified the interface searches for the object in the directories specified in the PATH variable for the interface The PATH variables for the interfaces include CVPATH CADDS interface PROE_PATH Pro ENGINEER interface MEDPROJ_PATH MEDUSA interface CVPATH CATIA interface CVPATH STEP interface 3 If the object is not found in the searchpath the current directory is searched GET The object to the Vault is copied to the local area using following criteria 1 The directory specified by the Idirname parameter This is applicable only to command line interface 2 The Create directory specified by one of the following variables CVCREATEDIR CADDS interface for CADDS Part CA_ASSYPPREFIX CADDS interface for PS CA_ASSYPREFIX CADDS interface for CAMU CA_ASSYPREFIX Pro ENGINEER interface CA_ASSYPREFIX MEDUSA interface CA_ASSYPREFIX CATIA interface CVCREATEDIR STEP interface 3 The current directory if the create directory variable is not defined EPD Connect User Guide C 5 Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Locating Objects for Vault Commands READ
291. sembly Tab When you select an assembly from the Information Browser and select File gt Open As gt Assembly the EPD Connect toolbar changes to the assembly mode The following sections describe the available menu options for the Assembly mode Information Browser Options The following table shows the default Information Browser commands are available when the Assembly tab is active Table 8 1 Information Browser Options Browser Commands Description Vault gt List All Assemblies Lists all CAMU assemblies to which you have access that reside in the Vault Vault gt List in work Assemblies Lists all CAMU assemblies that have been checked out of the Vault and are currently being worked on Vault gt All CADDS parts Lists all CADDS parts that reside in the Vault Local gt List all Assemblies Lists all CAMU assemblies to which you have access that reside on your local system Local gt Read Only Assemblies Lists all CAMU assemblies resident on your local system that you have checked out of the Vault with Read Only access Local gt All my CADDS parts Lists all CADDS parts that reside on your local system Query Fields When you select one of the options in the preceding table applicable information appears in the following fields e Name e Revision e Status e Syscode e Project e Type CAMU e Userid Node_name e Vault 8 26 EPD Connect User G
292. sending a 777 message to EPD Connect lookup rep A fragment to be added to the lookup rep file to enable 777 messages EPD Connect User Guide 10 17 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files Table 10 1 DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files template A VDI file fragment that is included in the root level VDI file Use this file to add specific functionality 10 18 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 11 Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA This chapter discusses the following topics Overview Setting up MEDUSA Support on the Vault Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines Sequence of Actions for MEDUSA Objects Working in EPD Connect EPD Connect User Guide 11 1 Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Overview Overview The EPD Interface for MEDUSA enables you to perform Vault operations on certain MEDUSA generated objects The EPD Interface for MEDUSA supports three types of MEDUSA objects e SHEET e MODEL e SYMBOL The environment from which you can issue a command depends on the object you are working on as follows e SHEET Vault commands can be issued on a SHEET from either MEDUSA or EPD Connect e MODEL Vault commands can be issued on a MODEL only from EPD Connect because the 2D Drafting menu for MEDUSA can be used only for a SHEET e SYMBOL Vault commands can be issued on a SYMBOL onl
293. ser password edmadmin Signing on to the Vault as edmadmin CDMSON016I Sign on to EDM server SARASWATI completed successfully You have 0 EDM message s EPD Connect User Guide 8 11 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface for CADDS Support Adding CADDS attributes CAMARL100I CONFIG RULE DB1 has been added CAMARL100I CONFIG RULE PS1 has been added CAMARL100I CONFIG OPT RULE DB1 has been added CAMARL100I CONFIG OPT RULE PS1 has been added CDMSOF017I Sign off from EDM completed successfully CADDS attributes added Optegra Interface for CADDS Installation Complete The EPD Interface for CADDS does not support the Catalog object with Vault transfer commands General Process Flow The general process flow is as described in the following sections Tree Structure and CAMU The order of operation for jointly using EPD Connect and an existing CADDS CAMU assembly is as follows 1 Start EPD Connect 2 Select the Assembly folder in the Information Browser 3 Choose Tools gt CADDS CAMU to invoke CAMU By default this opens CAMU in the Explicit Assembly mode 4 Open a new or an existing assembly For more information see Opening a New Assembly on page 8 18 and Opening an Existing Assembly on page 8 15 Please note A CAMU assembly isa _ db file Tree Structure Only If you want to work only on the CAMU assembly tree structure and not view and manipulate CADDS geometry open only the product str
294. set is no longer required you can identify these filesets by the prefix and delete them using the Vault user interface EPD Connect User Guide 7 29 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options e The restrictions on items that are a part of Vault filesets apply to those created for review as well Refer to the Vault documentation for more information on Vault filesets Responding to Reviews You can respond to the review of single or multiple Vault items at one time Responding to a Review of a Single Vault Item Respond to the review of a Vault item as follows 1 You can respond to the review request in one of the following ways a Select a Vault item Perform one of the following actions In the Data Browser select a Vault item that is in the In Review state In the Product Structure window select a node that is in the In Review state b Choose Database gt Vault gt Respond to Review OR a Choose Database gt Read Messages b Click Respond 7 30 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 2 The Respond to a Review dialog box opens Figure 7 4 Respond to a Review Dialog Box for a Single Vault Item This is fine 3 Select a Response option e Approve Approve the item e Reject Reject the item 4 Type your comments in the Comment field If the response is Reject typing a comment in the Comment field is mandatory 5 Click OK to send your res
295. sh Options Select Al Deselect Al Please note The copied components will be added as child components to the root node of the clipboard If you have copied an assembly node on the clipboard it is displayed with an arrow indicating that the node can be expanded further A component node is displayed with a square 3 Select the component in the Product Structure to which you want to add components from the clipboard 4 Choose the components on the clipboard that you want to paste If the clipboard is not displayed choose Window gt Clipboard 5 Choose Edit gt Paste to paste the components selected in the clipboard to the component selected in the Product Structure window EPD Connect User Guide 3 11 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the Tree Structure You can also click Paste on the toolbar to perform the paste operation Please note 1 The components from the clipboard are pasted as child components in the Product Structure 2 If you have pasted an assembly node in the Product Structure you can expand the node by e Selecting the node and choosing File gt Open OR e Saving the Product Structure closing it and opening it again and choosing Expand References gt All Undoing and Restoring Previous Editing To restore the state before the last edit choose Edit gt Undo You can also click Undo on the toolbar to perform the undo operation Please note This command affe
296. sing it so that you do not lose the changes saving a Product Structure Tree Locally Save a tree regularly when making edits To do this choose File gt Save The following conditions apply e The tree is saved to the local disk e If any reference trees have been edited they are also saved e If you have Vault installed choose Database gt Vault gt Update to save the changed tree to the Vault e If more than one Product Structure window with a product structure tree is open you can save the changed state of the tree that is displayed in the active window e Choose Database gt Vault gt Store to store a new tree in the Vault For more information refer to Storing Items in Vault on page 7 18 saving a Product Structure Tree as a New Tree To save all or part of a product structure tree locally under a new name 1 Select the component you want as the root node for the saved tree 2 Choose File gt Save As The Save Structure dialog box opens Seve Structure Application CAML r Wrectory Create r Meni ao Other Thiva tE Overwitla WEF No Hanae C 1 se Ananta Canc al 3 Enter a new name in the Name field to rename the tree 4 Select the appropriate application format for the file in the Application field 2 30 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Saving and Closing a Product Structure Tree 5 In the Directory field click the local directory option
297. sly is overwritten A 8 EPD Connect User Guide Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Limitations and Restrictions Limitations and Restrictions The single tree generation and activation has the following limitations This feature is valid only for the structure mode An appropriate variable setting is required before starting the EPD Connect session to enable this feature If you start CADDS CAMU in any other mode and then switch to the structure mode this feature is disabled The single tree feature is available only in the Explicit mode of CAMU and not in the Parametric mode The single DB that is generated is created temporarily in CAMU and cannot be saved permanently An assembly is activated only if CADDS CAMU is running and is started from EPD Connect Only the orientation changes of the components are reflected in the Product Structure window of EPD Connect Only a single user is allowed to work on the single DB that is currently active in CAMU EPD Connect User Guide A 9 Aradi Options for System Administrators This appendix explains options available to administer aspects of the system when EPD Connect is linked to a Vault These options are only available when you are signed on to the Vault e Creating Environments for Applications e Defining Applications e Setting Application Project Relationships e Switching the DOD e Setting Interface Preferences for Users Ple
298. ss spokes that are associated with a particular material are color coded with a black access indicator 4 6 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules To define rules that determine the color coding of access indicators 1 Choose View gt Access The Access Rules window opens Hiss Hollies fl ATR TATE TT RF WATE E matarial TOKOREG alur ima fel ae Hepat an tein aie LIE a Deele OL Una S00BRCE IITME mT GO ppi CLIE riller uur ase Y wr Mo Please note Ifan access indicator is subject to more than one rule the most recent rule overrides previous rules 2 In the Action field select Add 3 In the Color field select a color 4 In the Attribute list select an attribute Use the Edit Assembly Component Attribute window to assign the attributes EPD Connect User Guide 4 7 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules 5 In the Test column select a test character Table 4 1 Test Characters Options Description less than numeric value lt less than or equal to numeric equal to alpha or numeric not equal to alpha or numeric gt equal to or greater than numeric gt greater than numeric values like like permits the use of a wildcard like unlike permits the use of a wildcard 6 Enter a parameter for the access rule in the
299. ssembly file when a Pro ENGINEER assembly is stored in the Vault Store an assembly s or part s associated drawing file as a member file when an assembly or part is stored Support the instances of Pro ENGINEER references in the product structure For additional information regarding Process flow refer to Appendix C Process Flow of EPD Interface Commands Working with the product structure window refer to Chapter 2 Using the Product Structure Window and Chapter 4 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window EPD Connect User Guide 12 3 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Limitations Limitations The limitations of the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER are When Pro ENGINEER assemblies are stored their associated parts are not stored during the transaction and must be stored separately Pro MANUFACTURING process sheets are not supported When Pro ENGINEER objects are stored associated export files like neutral files are not stored Interaction with the Vault from the Pro ENGINEER Application Environment is not supported The interface lists in upper case the names of objects located in the Vault database and on the local disk To issue Vault commands from the command line interface specify the SELNAME in upper case This ensures that objects are listed in EPD Connect for Vault operations To use the EPD interface for Pro ENGINEER with EPD Connect locally you must disable the
300. sses directly related to the dashboard work With this knowledge the work can be coordinated with that of the associated teams The designer uses the Information Browser to learn about these processes The Information Browser is the common interface to access all data sources for the project 2 The designer wants to see the number of completed parts in the assembly and the current status of all parts directly related to the dashboard The work in progress on the windshield and steering mechanism parts are of particular concern To view the product structure tree the designer a Chooses the Structure tab in the Information Browser which contains a link to the Vault where the assembly structure is stored b Signs on to the Vault by choosing Database gt Signon from the menu bar e Displays all Vault product structure files in the Data Browser by choosing Vault gt List all Product Structures in the Information Browser The Data Browser is explained later in this chapter d Opens the windshield assembly file in the Product Structure window by selecting the required file pressing the right mouse button and clicking Open 1 4 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview An EPD Connect Scenario The Product Structure window displays the selected product structure as shown in the following figure Product Structure En Qe M c P e s aod bbb ol 3 The designer wants to see how many parts in the assembly have been
301. structure This is similar to the way rotation and translation information orientation information is stored Symmetry is done in the component space and positioning in the global or the local space according to the current behavior of EPD Connect The difference between global and local symmetry is that the component is either X or Y mirrored A product structure consists of components positioned and oriented in the 3D space independent of each other A component can be duplicated several times at different positions using translations and rotations Each position is represented by e an instance of that component e an instance node in the assembly tree An instance can be translated or rotated in the same way Please note Symmetry options in EPD Connect are enabled only when the CA USE SYMMETRY variable is set to 1 in the epdconn ini file Mirroring Mirroring allows you to apply a symmetry to an existing instance before orienting and positioning it Mirroring in EPD Connect is not the capability to duplicate and transform a group of instances by using a symmetry plane Mirroring is a symmetry against a plane XZ or YZ plane Mirroring in EPD Connect can be defined or managed from the CAMU database in two ways From EPD Connect e From external applications by using the OpenNavigator command language 1 22 EPD Connect User Guide EPD Connect Overview Symmetry in EPD Connect The geometry of the mirrored compo
302. t Structure window 2 55 Link View menu 4 30 Load Display menu 5 5 5 20 Log audit 2 38 Logon to database 7 5 M Measuring distance 3D Viewer 5 8 MEDUSA Interface 1 14 11 1 MEDUSA preprocess and postprocess routines 11 5 Memory dialog 2 4 Memory File menu 2 23 Memory to store tree 2 23 Messages reading 7 13 Messages sending 7 13 MockUp 1 8 1 15 Moving camera 3D Viewer 5 12 Multiple CVPATHS 2 39 Vault item request for review 7 28 Multiple product structure trees Access rules 4 8 Clear menu 4 31 Closing 15 6 Database menu options 7 4 Edit menu 3 2 Exploring 15 6 Opening 2 10 Restore state 4 21 Save state 4 20 Tree font 4 5 Multiple Vault items Respond to review 7 32 Storing constraints 7 20 N Navigator license considerations in EPD Connect 1 27 New File menu 2 8 O Open Configuration dialog 2 9 8 14 Open file in 3D Viewer 5 4 Open New Configuration dialog 2 8 Open product structure tree 2 9 CVPATH 2 9 Opening EPD Connect 1 19 Operators 4 10 4 13 4 15 Options 5 26 Options Disolay menu 5 26 Orientation component 3 5 Orientations Read A 7 Overview 1 2 P Password change for database 7 14 Paste edit command 3 10 3 11 Path name absolute 1 16 Plotting Variables 2 53 Polygons Displaying 5 26 Positioning Components 3 13 Postprocess routines 8 42 Postprocess routines MEDUSA 11 5 Prefix Fileset B 12 Preprocess and postprocess routines 8 42 Preprocess routines
303. t User Guide 14 9 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Creating STEP Output Converting CADDS Files to STEP Files To convert a CADDS file to a STEP file with the CADDS file s product structure active 1 Choose File gt Export The Export Structure dialog box opens i Lape oS seh ZHEN Y TEP E araclure Only llHac liher kra et Sire aban F Tuwri b vaa s M ika r s Aib apelin SME a Ce CERES aby a FILA Ed riedu noe hidu CH oy hrhajlkohlal cee nibe 2 In the Name field enter the name of the exported file 3 In the Export to field choose STEP 4 For Directory click Create 5 For Overwrite click Yes 6 For Nodes click All or Selected To save the entire tree click All Otherwise select the components you want to save and click Selected 7 For Options click the type of data to export e Structure and CM Attributes only A STEP file is created containing only product structure and attributes compliant with Conformance Class 1 of STEP AP203 e All AP 203 data A STEP file is created containing product structure attributes and geometry Saving all AP 203 data can be time consuming if the structure s geometry is complex 14 10 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Creating STEP Output e Include Geometry for highlighted nodes only A STEP file is created that contains product structure attributes and the geometry of hi
304. t are used for comparison Use the All Attribute list to select attributes and add them to the Compare Attribute list 4 Choose an option to set the comparison rules Options Description Add All Adds all attributes in one operation 1 Click the Add All button 2 Click Apply Reset also reinstates all attributes Add Allows you to add attributes from the All Attribute list 1 Select a required attribute from the All Attribute list The Add button is activated by default 2 Click Apply to add it to the Compare Attribute list 3 Repeat the operation for other attributes you want to add Delete Deletes an attribute not required for the compare operation This is the default option 1 Select an attribute from the Compare Attribute list The Delete button is activated 2 Click Apply to delete it from the list 3 Repeat the operation for other attributes not required Delete All Clears the Compare Attribute list and allows you to insert attributes 1 Click Delete All 2 Click Apply 5 Click Restore From Memory to swap the displayed and stored trees 6 The color of the text label of the displayed tree components indicate the results of the comparison e Black The element is the same unchanged e Green The element is changed e White The element is new 7 Choose Report to select a file in which you can place the results of the comparison For more informati
305. t or the weight is less than the planned weight Creating Display Rules You can define display rules that determine which components are displayed or hidden on the component tree For each rule you can define one or more attribute characteristics as selection criteria When you apply the rule components having attributes that match the criteria are hidden on the component tree 4 14 EPD Connect User Guide Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules To define component visibility rules follow these steps 1 Choose View gt Visibility to open the Visibility Rules window The current list of visibility rules is listed in the data display area at the top of the window Visibility Rules OP ATTRIBUTE TEST CASE VALUE so AND V Templates Add y Change V Delete By value Attribute Value l Ignore Case ves Vv Vv we Vv Vv vi Vv Visibility Clear Apply Reset Cancel 2 In the Operator field choose an operator The following operators are available e AND This is the default When more than a single rule is defined this operator combines the rules and hides the nodes that satisfy all the rules e OR When more than a single rule is specified this operator combines the rules and hides the nodes that satisfy any of the rules 3 In the Action field select Add 4 Select the attribute you want to use for the test in the Attribu
306. t strings Enclose text strings with single or double quotation marks Integer n Supply an integer for n Real number Xx Supply a real number for x mkdir cdrom Indicates the root superuser prompt on command lines rloginremote_system_name 1 Indicates the C shell prompt on command root lines rlogin remote_system_name 1 Indicates the Bourne shell prompt on command root lines gt gt copy filename Indicates the MS DOS prompt on command lines Keystrokes Return or Control g Indicates the keys to press on a keyboard xxii EDP Connect User Guide Preface Online User Documentation Online documentation for each Optegra book is provided in HTML if the documentation CD ROM is installed You can view the online documentation from an HTML browser or from the HELP command You can also view the online documentation directly from the CD ROM without installing it From an HTML Browser 1 Navigate to the directory where the documents are installed For example EPD_HOME data html htmldoc UNIX EPD_HOME data html1 htmldoc Windows NT 2 Click mainmenu html A list of available Optegra documentation appears 3 Click the book title you want to view From the HELP Command To view the online documentation for your specific application click HELP Consult the documentation specific to your application for more information From the Documentation CD ROM 1 Mount the documentation CD ROM 2 Point your
307. t tab to list objects located in the Vault database or choose the Local tab to list objects located on the local disk Click the Options button The Query Options dialog box opens Choose one of the following applications to select a CADDS object CADDS PS CAMU ADRAW Click OK or Apply EPD Connect User Guide 8 41 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Working with EPD Connect 6 Select an object from the list and choose a Vault operation from Database gt Vault Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines You can add a preprocessing or postprocessing shell script or other routine to run before your store replace update get or read command For example if you want to ensure that a file naming convention is maintained you can create a preprocessing routine to check file names before a store command is executed This capability allows easy correspondence between the interface and third party applications Define preprocessing and postprocessing routines by setting the corresponding environment variables as follows COMMAND_ PRE POST PROCESS executable file name where COMMAND is store replace update get or read The environment variables used by the interface are available in the caddsrb ini file You can customize this file If you set these variables source this file before starting the EPD Connect session For more details see Installing EPD Connect EPD Roles and EPD Visualizer You must set the
308. tabase gt Vault gt Read Specific Rev The request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box 3 Select the Vault item to copy and click Apply If the item cannot be copied the Audit Transaction Log window opens with an error message Updating Vault Items To copy an item of the current revision to Vault and update it 1 Select the item that you want to update 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Update The request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box 3 Select the Vault item to update and click Apply If the item cannot be updated the Audit Transaction Log window opens with an error message Replacing Vault Items To move a Vault item back to the Vault database and unlock it 1 Select the item that you want to move back and unlock 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Replace The request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box EPD Connect User Guide 7 17 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 3 Select the Vault item that you want to move and click Apply If the item cannot be moved back the Audit Transaction Log window opens with the error message Unlocking Vault Items To unlock a Vault item that is signed out 1 Select the item that you want to unlock 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Reset The request is transferred to the Vault Transfer Requests dialog box 3 Select the Vault item that you want to unlock and click Apply s
309. tabase attributes for individual components after the tree is opened select the tree component Then choose Database gt Vault gt Refresh Attributes Opening a Product Structure with TIM Components You can open a product structure file whose nodes are associated with TIM components The TIM flag of each node of the file is processed and a predefined color is set for the associated TIM part The TIM assembly is marked by the prefix ee EPD Connect User Guide 2 11 Using the Product Structure Window Working with Four Product Structure Windows Working with Four Product Structure Windows EPD Connect allows you to work with upto four Product Structure windows at a time Using the product structure configurations that are open you can perform the following operations e Display multiple product structure configurations in EPD Visualizer or 3D Viewer e Identify the Product Structure window from which the component is loaded e Compare two product structure trees loaded in different Product Structure windows e Perform clash detection for nodes that are selected across different Product Structure windows e Highlight components by zone across different Product Structure windows e Identify a Product Structure window by the name of the configuration Displaying Multiple Product Structure Configurations in EPD Visualizer or 3D Viewer You can display more than one product structure configuration in EPD Visualizer or 3D V
310. tations EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Support Understanding the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Preprocessing and Postprocessing Working in EPD Connect EPD Connect User Guide 12 1 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Overview Overview The EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER allows you to perform Vault operations on Pro ENGINEER objects Pro ENGINEER objects on which you can perform Vault operations are as follows e Assemblies e Parts e Layouts e Formats e Drawings The Vault commands that you can use are as follows e store e get e read e update e replace Please note Product structures opened in the EPD Connect browser for Pro ENGINEER assembly are intended only for purposes of viewing Do not attempt to modify displayed structures by adding or deleting nodes The File gt Save function for the Pro ENGINEER assembly is not supported by EPD Connect interface If you execute a File gt Save command no data will actually be written to disk The following message will be displayed Successfully saved 1 of 1 12 2 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Features Features The EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER allows you to Interact with Vault using EPD Connect Use environment variables to add a software routine that runs immediately before and or after a Vault command is executed Support Releases 11 through 21 and 20001 of Pro ENGINEER Store product structure attributes with the a
311. te 4 Select the assembly component in the Product Structure and right click Choose the Paste Assy Comp option to paste the selected component from the clipboard EPD Connect User Guide 8 33 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab You can also choose Edit gt Paste Assy Comp to paste the selected component from the clipboard QG eqmicleleis lt lt lt gt gt gt Limitations e Assemblies other than PS and CAMU and components other than the CADDS parts will be ignored during the paste operation e The ADRAWS associated with the CAMU files will not be copied or pasted along with the CAMU files e Application objects of type LOCAL PTCPRT PTCDRW PTCLAY CATMODEL MEDSHT MEDSHT MEDMOD MEDSYM and STEPPART will not be copied or pasted 8 34 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Performing Vault Operations on CADDS Performing Vault Operations on CADDS The EPD Interface to CADDS enables you to perform Vault operations on CADDS generated objects and associated objects This section discusses the following topics Overview Features Limitations Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines Understanding EPD Interface to CADDS Working with EPD Connect Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines Overview You can perform Vault operations on following objects using the CADDS Interface CADDS Parts CAMU Assemblies Product
312. te list 5 Select a test option in the Test column Refer to step 5 on page 4 8 for a brief description of each operator EPD Connect User Guide 4 15 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Setting the Component Display Rules Select a Test By attribute option e Value Defines a rule for a given value of the selected attribute e Attribute Defines a comparison between two attributes Click Apply to create the rule Click Visibility to apply the rule to the product structure tree Components that satisfy the attribute value or comparison are hidden from the display The hide function is applied to the components that satisfy the applied rules in the list applied with the Boolean operator AND or OR In addition any components hidden by a previous action also remain hidden Please note The procedure for changing or deleting a visibility rule is the same as described for changing or deleting an access rule Click Clear or select Clear gt All Hidden to redisplay the hidden components You can save highlight rules to a template and recall them as needed Example The following steps have the effect of hiding all components that have been modified since they were last read out from the Vault 1 2 Select Attribute to display a compare list of attributes Select READ_TIME from the attribute list on the left Select the less than or equal to Operator lt Select the attribute MODIF
313. ted e You can select CAMU ADRAWS as part of the set of items to be sent for review However to disable this option set the CA_ADD_ ADRAWS IN _CAMU variable to 0 in the epdconn ini file 2 Choose Database gt Vault gt Request Review 3 The Request Review dialog box opens The name revision and application of the items selected are listed in the top panel 7 28 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options Figure 7 3 The Request Review Dialog Box for Multiple Vault Items a a Se ee EERTE hd _ Request Review Nne 52426001 55415CD1 72911001 82254 CAM DEFAULT COMPLETE EXPLODED coond GOODMULI mment se Please review these files 4 Type your comments in the Comment field 5 Click OK to send the request This creates a fileset in Vault containing the selected items that is sent for review Please note e Seta value to the CA_REQRV_PREFIX variable in epdconn ini to define the prefix of the name of the fileset To implement a common prefix for all EPD Connect clients the CA_REQRV_PREFIX variable is set on the server by default Administrators can change the default by choosing Admin gt GUI Preferences in the EPD Connect toolbar This setting takes a precedence over the epdconn ini setting For more information refer to Setting Interface Preferences for Users on page B 11 e After a review is complete and if the file
314. the context sensitive menu 8 22 EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Associative Topology Bus For additional information on the Export File dialog box see Using Associative Topology Bus Enabled CADDS Si Please note If you get the following message when exporting a CADDS part on Windows NT install LOCATOR PC that installs the dynamic link library EDMAPI32 dl11 The dynamic link library EDMAPI32 d1ll couldn t be found in specified path Verifying TIM Parts and Assemblies To verify that existing TIM parts or assemblies from the root or reference assembly are up to date with the original CADDS or Pro ENGINEER parts or assemblies perform one of the following tasks e Choose File gt Topology Bus gt Verify The Verify TIM CADDS dialog box opens so that you can select the part or assembly to verify OR e Select a TIM node in the CAMU Product Structure window and right click to choose Verify TIM from the context sensitive menu After the verification a report of the operation is displayed and the transaction is logged in the EPD Connect Audit Log For more information see Using Associative Topology Bus Enabled CADDS Si The verification has the following effect on the TIM nodes in the CAMU Product Structure window e The color of the outdated TIM part changes The default is green e A prefix is given to outdated assemblies The default is O For information on how to customize the colors
315. the hierarchy of its application objects 1 2 3 Start EPD Connect Open the product structure of the selected CADDS model Click on the required nodes of the CADDS model in the Product Structure window Click the right mouse button and choose Explore Object from the pop up menu to explore the model and display the hierarchy and attributes of the application objects OR Choose File gt Explore Object to explore the model The explored model appears with a different color Refer to CA _AEC CUSTOM _COLOR 2 on page 15 16 for details Click the right mouse button and choose Close Object to remove the explored model from the Product Structure window OR Choose File gt Close Object to close the explored model EPD Connect User Guide 15 5 Working with AEC Application Objects in EPD Connect Working with Application Objects in the Product Structure Window Figure 15 1 Explored Model in the Product Structure window Product Structure pe TA a nage pe q ley M cl Ppefs eee ER je e If more than one Product Structure window with the product structure components is open the Exploring and Closing operations work only on the active product structure e The File gt Save option for the explored nodes is blocked in EPD Connect If you execute the File gt Save command no data about the explored objects is written to the disk Use the File gt Save as command to save the PS t
316. the product structure if the object is an assembly Please note The child objects for the Pro ENGINEER assembly are not managed with the assembly The child objects must be stored individually The update and replace commands follow a procedure similar to that of the store command The get and read Commands When you execute a get or read command on a Pro ENGINEER generated object the interface e Retrieves the Pro ENGINEER object from the Vault and places the object in the directory specified by CA_ASSY_PREFIX for GET command or in the directory specified by CA_READ_PREFIX for READ command In case these variables are not defined the objects are copied into the current working directory e If the object is an assembly or part and there is a member drawing file the drawing file is retrieved and placed along with the object EPD Connect User Guide 12 7 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Preprocessing and Postprocessing Preprocessing and Postprocessing The EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER allows you to perform preprocessing and postprocessing during the initial and cleanup phases of the rulebase execution The preprocessing and postprocessing routines are executed when the PREPROCESS and POSTPROCESS environment variables are set and the executable files exist If these processes fail the rulebase exits The rulebase is executed in three phases as follows 1 Initial Processing 2 Execution 3 Cleanup F
317. tions from CAMU Reading Orientations from CAMU To read the orientations from CAMU and reflect them in EPD Connect 1 Activate the single DB as explained in the previous section 2 Change the orientations of the components in the assembly as required in CADDS CAMU 3 Choose Tools gt Read Orientations from CAMU to display the product structure in EPD Connect The nodes that have changed orientations are highlighted in the window Product Structure f a BEE apam HEER z meN mR Please note To save the active DB file automatically in CAMU assign the value 1 to the AUTO_FILE_ASSY variable in the epdconn ini file The default value is 0 where the orientation changes made in CAMU must be saved manually before you read the orientation in the Product Structure window 4 The Report Viewer window displays the information for the nodes for which the orientations have changed EPD Connect User Guide A 7 Interacting with CAMU from EPD Connect An Alternate Approach Reading Orientations from CAMU 5 Choose File gt Save to save the orientation changes made to the product structure in the local disk Please note If you have changed the product structure after generating the single DB while working in the CAMU environment EPD Connect displays a message before reflecting the orientation in the active product structure If you choose to continue the orientation of all the nodes that existed previou
318. tions must be active Options for Editing Components When you add cut or change a component you are editing it You can limit edits to a single instance of a component or apply the edits to all instances of that class 1 Choose Edit gt Options The Node Selection dialog box opens Hode Selection Edit Al Modes ves Mo 3 2 EPD Connect User Guide Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree The Edit Menu 2 Select one of the following options e Yes Edits all instances The edits to one component are applied to all instances of that component e No Edits a single instance Only one component is edited 3 Click Apply to implement the selection If you select No and want to modify a single instance of a component EPD Connect adds a prefix to the component name to make it unique Editing the Properties of a TIM Component You can edit the properties of a TIM component in the same way that you edit the attributes of a component in the product structure If you change the associated component of a node or the application type to CADDS CAMU the TIM data is extracted from the header and is checked to determine if the associated model is TIM or not The node changes and is displayed accordingly Limitations and Restrictions e TIM flag data is read only from the _ pd file while adding or changing components in case of parts In case of assemblies It is read from the _ db file e When you update chang
319. toring Items in Vault Using the Store options on the Database gt Vault menu you can store single or multiple items in the Vault at one time Storing a Single Item To store a single item in the Vault 1 Click Refresh in the Data Browser to update the item list 2 Select the item you want to store in the Vault 7 18 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 3 Choose Database gt Vault gt Store The Store dialog box opens 4 Click OK to store the item Storing Multiple Items To store multiple items in Vault at a time 1 Click Refresh in the Data Browser to update the directory listing 2 Select the items you want to store in the Vault For information on the types of items that cannot be stored in a multiple store operation see the section Constraints on page 7 20 EPD Connect User Guide 7 19 Working with Vault Data Using the Vault Menu Options 3 Choose Database gt Vault gt Store The Store dialog box opens a store Application PS EDM Local Name Appi ENOSOL1 Pe Revision J Leave blank for first revision J Signed out N Was Ho Gass sy Public w Private Project f El Status Leave blank for initial in work User Type system Type Part No Description OK Reset Cancel Please note When storing multiple items you cannot edit the EDM Local Name field 4 Click OK to store the items After the store ope
320. tree display after saving it 1 Click NO in the Close field and Click Apply To close the tree in order to open another 1 Click Yes in the Close field and click Apply Restore To retrieve a tree display from memory 1 Select the tree from the list in the display area 2 Click the Restore option 3 Click Apply to display the selected tree Delete To remove a tree display from memory without actually deleting the tree from the local work area 1 Select the tree from the list in the display area 2 Click the Delete option 3 Click Apply to delete the selected tree 3 When you apply the selections the currently displayed tree is replaced with the tree selected from memory The memory directory is usually usr tmp You can open more than one product structure tree and save the displayed trees in the memory In this case e The name of the active configuration is displayed in the Name field when you open the Memory dialog box e The Save option saves the active tree which is displayed in the list in the display area e The Restore option retrieves the trees from memory and can open a maximum of four product structures e The Delete option removes the selected product structure tree from the list in the display area Compress Mode When you save the product structure tree it changes to uncompress mode When you restore the tree from memory the product structure tree opens in compressed mode in the activ
321. tructure Window 2 3 Product Structure Window Toolbar 2 4 EPD Connect Toolbar for the Product Structure Window ___ 2 5 Mouse Behavior 2 6 Creating a New Product Structure Tree 2 8 Opening a Product Structure Tree 2 9 Opening a Product Structure Tree from a Local Disk 2 9 Displaying Subtree Components 2 10 Retrieving Associated Attributes 2 10 Opening a Product Structure with TIM Components__ 2 11 Working with Four Product Structure Windows 2 12 Contents vi EPD Connect User Guide Displaying Multiple Product Structure Configurations in EPD Visualizer or 3D Viewer 2 12 Identifying the Product Structure Window from Which a Component is Loaded 2 13 Comparing Tree Components Across Product Structure Windows 2 13 Highlighting Components by Zone Across Product Structure Windows 2 14 Performing Clash Detection Across Product Structure Windows 2 14 Identifying a Product Structure Window by the Name ___ 2 15 Closing and Expanding Reference Components 2 16 Expanding One or More Reference Components 2 16 Refreshing Exoanded Reference Components 2 16 Closing One or More Reference Components 2 17 Expanding and Closing Hidden Reference Components_____ 2 17 Hiding Selected or Highlighted Components 2 18 Example 2 18 Editing Component Attributes 2 19 Defining Assembly Attributes and Values Externally 2 2 Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation 2
322. ts It is useful to store the trees in memory to facilitate these actions For more information refer to Using Local Memory for Tree Manipulation on page 2 23 Cutting and Pasting the Components To cut and paste components from one tree to another 1 Select the components you want to cut 2 Choose Edit gt Cut to remove the selected component and its associated subcomponents from the product structure window db You can also click the Cut on the toolbar to perform the cut operation The cut components are added to the clipboard when you perform the cut operation Please note If you are cutting components from open product structures you can choose to remove lock files for such components by assigning a value to the variable CA DEL LOCK ON CUT in the epdconn ini file e Set the value of this variable to 0 to disable the removal of lock files This is the default setting EPD Connect User Guide 3 9 Creating and Editing a Product Structure Tree Editing the Tree Structure e Set the value of this variable to 1 to remove lock files during the cut operation If you perform the paste or the undo operations using this setting the cut nodes are pasted back to the active product structure in the read only mode 3 Select the component to which you want to add components from the clipboard 4 Choose the components on the clipboard that you want to paste If the clipboard is not displayed choose Window gt
323. tting e CVUPS CDIR var spool cvconfigdir The default directory location of the plotter configuration files e CVUPS INS DIR usr apl cvups The default directory location for installing cvups e CVUPS DEFDIR SCVUPS INS DIR config files The default directory location of the plotter definition files EPD Connect User Guide 2 53 Using the Product Structure Window Plotting a Tree Structure e CVUPS BIN DIR SCVUPS_ INS DIR bin The default directory location of the cvups binaries e CVUPS_ XORIG 10 CVUPS_YORIG 10 The offset values for the X and the Y plotting origins on the paper The default value is 10 millimeters Apart from the above variables set appropriate values to the following variables in the epdconn ini file e CA_CVUPS CDIR var spool cvconfigdir The configuration file directory for plotting an Access Ware tree e AW TEXT SHRINK 0 75 The shrink factor for the AccessWare plot node text can be changed by setting appropriate values The default value is 0 75 Sometimes when the font size is very large the text goes beyond the actual tree nodes To avoid this set an appropriate value to this variable greater than 0 0 and less than 1 0 e CA PLOT DIR SEPD TEMP The default directory location for plotting the files 2 54 EPD Connect User Guide Using the Product Structure Window Launching Applications from Product Structure Components Launching Applications from Product Structure Components Components
324. uct Structure windows by performing the following steps 1 2 Choose Tools gt Zoning The Highlight Components by Zone dialog box opens Select the zones from the Available Zones list and add them to the Selected Zones list The Active Configurations list displays the names of the active configurations in all the Product Structure windows The current working configuration is selected in the list by default Select the required configurations from the list To select all the configurations click the All option Click Apply The nodes in the selected configurations that are covered by the zone are highlighted in the Product Structure window irrespective of whether the corresponding product structure is active or not Performing Clash Detection Across Product Structure Windows You can perform clash detection on nodes present in different Product Structure windows by performing the following steps 1 2 Select the nodes from the required product structure configurations Choose Tools gt Clash Detection The Interference Detection dialog box opens The Active configurations list displays the active configurations in all the Product Structure windows The current working configuration is selected in the list by default Select the required configurations from the list To select all the configurations click the All option Click Apply to perform clash detection for the nodes selected across di
325. ucture 1 Start EPD Connect 2 Select the Structure folder in the Information Browser EPD Connect User Guide Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface for CADDS Support 3 Choose File gt Open from the top bar The Open Configuration dialog box opens Open Configuration Name et ee st Query Patlem aas Revision E Application CAMU OO Bj Location Local Disk y Database Directory Create Read y Other _ CVPATH fusers smunidh parts File Mode Read Only wite Expand References vy All Loval 144 Query Attribute Data Il Local _ Database OK Apply Reset Cancel 4 Specify the assembly name in the Name field A CAMU assembly is an _db file 5 Specify the CAMU file type in the Application field 6 Specify the Create Read Other or the CVPATH directory options Please note e You can specify the CVPATH option along with the Create Read or Other directory options for opening a CAMU file In such cases if the file does not exist in the create read or the user directories the system opens the first occurrence of the file in the CVPATH e Incase of a reference assembly you can specify the directory for opening the file by setting a value to the CA_SEARCH_REF_DIR in the epdconn ini file If you specify a value 1 to the CA_SEARCH_REF_DIR variable the system EPD Connect User Guide 8 13 Using CAMU in EPD Connect EPD Interface for CADDS Support searches for th
326. ues for the location of the origin Specify ANGX ANGY or ANGZ for the orientation of the component in space To specify the units for orientation to be displayed in the Component Status window specify a value 0 or 1 to the COMPSTATUS_ORIENT_DEG variable in the epdconn ini file The value 0 allows you to specify the orientation in radians The value 1 allows you to specify the orientation in degrees Specify the translation or position units as millimeters MM centimeters CM meters M or inches IN The default is centimeters To specify the units for position to be displayed in the Component Status window specify the values CM MM M or INS to the COMPSTATUS ORIENT_POS variable in the epdconn ini file The value CM allows you to specify the position in centimeters MM allows you to specify the position in millimeters M allows you to specify the position in meters and IN allows you to specify the position in inches The values that you specify here are reflected in the Properties window as well as the Component Status window The system also converts one unit of measurement to the required units and displays it Select the angle of rotation in degrees or radians Please note The default measurements in CAMU are in inches e f Select the scope of the orientation as follows Local Specifies the orientation relative to the parent orientation of the item Global Specifies the orientation relative to the assem
327. uide Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab File Menu When you select the Assembly tab from the Information Browser the contents of the File menu change The options are as follows Commands Description Activate New Assembly Creates a new CAMU assembly in the Product Structure window Activate Old Assembly Opens an existing CAMU assembly in the Product Structure window Open Close Reference Opens all the reference assemblies within a given assembly This option appears only when you set the variable CAMU_EXPAND REF ENABLE to 1 inthe epdconn ini file File Assembly Files the assembly using its active name Displays a CAMU alert window when you file a TIM assembly File Assembly with Options Files the assembly using options such as a different name Select CVPATH Selects all the variables with the prefix CVPATH and applies them to the current EPD Connect session Print Prints the assembly Plot Creates a binary CGM file format of the assembly and plots it Save Adrawing Saves the Adrawing Restore Adrawing Restores the Adrawing Quit Suspended Closes without filing all suspended parts Quit and Exit Assembly Closes without filing all suspended parts as well as the active assembly database Enter LDM Displays the CADDS Local Data Manager Session Summary Reports the general and the structure info
328. ult The interface rulebase determines the location of the object files by checking e The CA_ASSYPREFIX or CA_READPREFIX which can be set to the MEDUSA project directory MEDPROJ_PATH where the objects are stored or placed e The current working directory from which the store command was issued e The user s home directory EPD Connect User Guide 11 7 Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Working in EPD Connect Working in EPD Connect Using EPD Connect you can apply Vault commands on MEDUSA objects such as sheets models and symbols EPD Connect allows you to Add MEDUSA objects to product structures Refer to Chapters 4 through 6 for information on working with product structures List MEDUSA objects located on the local disk and in the Vault To list MEDUSA objects Choose Window gt Data Browser Choose the Vault tab to list objects located in the Vault database or choose the Local tab to list objects located on the local disk Click the Options button The Query Options dialog box opens Choose Application to selecta MEDUSA object MEDUSA Click OK or Apply Select an object from the list and choose a Vault transfer operation from Database gt Vault EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 12 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER This chapter briefly describes how to access Pro ENGINEER in EPD Connect This chapter discusses the following topics Overview Features Limi
329. unches the CAMU Change Assembly property sheet If the selected assembly that is being changed has any associated TIM assemblies CAMU sends a message to EPD Connect to display the nodes of the assembly as a TIM node Remove Assembly Enables you to remove the selected assembly component within the active assembly This launches the CAMU Remove Assembly property sheet Lock Component Locks the selected component and optionally all of its child components within the active assembly This launches the CAMU Lock Component property sheet You must first lock a component in order to manipulate it add child components and so on Copy Component Enables you to create a duplicate of the selected component and its children This launches the CAMU Copy Component property sheet Paste Enables you to paste the copied components present from the Assemblies Components clipboard to the CAMU assembly that is open EPD Connect User Guide 8 29 Using CAMU in EPD Connect Using the Information Browser Assembly Tab ACT Option Description Reorder Component Enables you to rearrange the appearance but not the parent child relationships of the active assembly by relocating the selected component This launches the CAMU Reorder Component property sheet CAMU Application Toolbar The CAMU toolbar contains icons that launch standard CADDS CAMU property sheets or direct actions It also contains several E
330. und BatchClash Add Configuration dialog box refer Opening a Product Structure Tree on page 2 9 4 Click Apply in the Highlight Components by Zone dialog box The zoning operation is run in the background mode on the added configurations 5 Click the Results tab in the Highlight Components by Zone dialog box Select a configuration from the list displayed e Click View to view the results in the Report Viewer and the Product Structure window The nodes in the selected configurations that are covered by the zone are highlighted in the Product Structure window irrespective of whether the corresponding product structure is active or not e Click Zone Data to view zone information Please note If there is an open configuration in the Product Structure window then the Highlight Components By Zone dialog box shows two options Background and Foreground If a configuration is not open in the Product Structure window then the Highlight Components By Zone dialog box shows only the Background option EPD Connect User Guide 6 9 Chapter 7 Working with Vault Data This chapter tells you how to use the Data Browser window to query the Vault for listings of data It also describes how to transfer data between the local disk and the Vault The following topics are discussed e The Data Browser Window e Using the Database Menu Options e Using the Vault Menu Options e Obtaining Information from the Vault e Working with Vault Data
331. utable file name where COMMAND is store replace update get or read The environment variables used by the interface are available in the medusarb ini file Customize this file If you set these variables source this file before starting the EPD Connect session For more details see Installing EPD Connect EPD Roles and EPD Visualizer You must set the environment variables for preprocessing and postprocessing in the user environment or the medusarb ini file before you start the EPD Connect session The interface checks for the variables before executing the command If a variable is found the interface tries to execute it The Vault passes the names of the input and output files to the executable file The following table lists and describes the preprocessing and postprocessing variables Variable Description COMMAND_PREPROCESS When the value is the name of an executable file the interface tries to run it before executing rulebase initialization COMMAND_POSTPROCESS When the value is the name of an executable file the interface tries to run it after executing the rulebase initialization where COMMAND is store replace update get or read EPD Connect User Guide 11 5 Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Sequence of Actions for MEDUSA Objects sequence of Actions for MEDUSA Objects This information in this section is provided for programmers who are customizing the interface The fo
332. vel of the corresponding component in the database 1 Select the component 2 Choose Edit gt Set Revisions Changing the Revision Levels of a Component You can change the revision level of a tree component to give it a revision level that is different from the corresponding component in the database To do this 1 Select the component 2 Choose Edit gt Unset Revisions 3 18 EPD Connect User Guide Chapter 4 Customizing the Product structure Tree Window This chapter explains how to control the way components in a product structure tree are displayed Selecting and Displaying Components Setting the Component Display Rules Defining the Display State for TIM Components Saving Display States Restoring Display States Compressing a Display Structure Browsing for Components Creating and Clearing Display Conditions EPD Connect User Guide 4 1 Customizing the Product Structure Tree Window Selecting and Displaying Components selecting and Displaying Components This section explains how to set and display the components in a product structure tree Setting the Component Selection You can determine the selection mode for tree components To do this 1 Choose View gt Control The Selection Control dialog box opens Tree State Single uti Node VY Subassy Browser State single multi Compress Nodes yes no Scroll Report _ yes Wo Apply Reset Cancel The S
333. vely Select Components Highlights the affected components Undo and Redo EPD Connect instructs DIVISION MockUp to undo or redo an action Start 3D Viewer Starts DIVISION MockUp and opens the current configuration Restore configuration from memory Restores the configuration from memory and opens the configuration in the EPD Connect Product Structure EPD Connect User Guide 10 15 Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp Communication between EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp window and its equivalent representation in VDI format in DIVISION MockUp e Update dVISE tree Updates any unreferenced changes between the EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp trees e Exit EPD Connect Quits EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp 10 16 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Connect Interface for DIVISION MockUp DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files All files required to configure EPD Connect and DIVISION MockUp are available in the DIVISION MockUp installation directory These files are located within the etc epd and system epd subdirectories which are specified relative to the DIVISIONROOT environment variable For example home division etc epd Table 10 1 DIVISION MockUp EPD Connect Integration Files etc epd userenv GO Demonstration script dvise_epd_rc Environment settings dVISE_Layout DIVISION MockUp window positions
334. ventions 11 2 Features 11 3 Limitations 11 3 Setting up MEDUSA Support on the Vault 11 4 Creating Preprocessing and Postprocessing Routines 11 5 Sequence of Actions for MEDUSA Objects 11 6 Working in EPD Connect 11 8 Using the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Overview 12 2 Features 12 3 Limitations 12 4 EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER Support 12 5 Understanding the EPD Interface for Pro ENGINEER 12 6 Supported Objects and Optegra Commands 12 6 The store update and replace Commands 12 7 The get and read Commands 12 7 Preprocessing and Postprocessing 12 8 Working in EPD Connect 12 9 Working with the Information Browser 12 9 Working with the Data Browser 12 9 Using the EPD Interface for CATIA Overview 13 2 Features 13 3 Limitations 13 4 EPD Connect User Guide Contents xvii Working with CATIA Data in the Vault Setting Up CATIA Support on Vault Querying Vault for CATIA Data Working in EPD Connect Working with the Information Browser Working with the Data Browser Working with 3D Viewer and EPD Visualizer Working with CATIA Assemblies or Models Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Overview Features Displaying STEP Folders and Files Opening Product Structures That Originate as STEP Files Viewing a STEP File s Geometry Working with STEP Product Structures Creating STEP Output Converting STEP Files to and from CADDS Converting STEP File
335. window 14 4 EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Features To display a STEP file s product structure 1 In the Data browser click the file 2 Press the right mouse button The menu that is displayed lists the actions you can perform on the selected STEP file The following table lists and describes these actions Table 14 1 Data Browser File Options Command Action Open Displays the STEP file s product structure Open Displays the Open Configuration dialog box You can query for a specific file and then display its product structure Refresh Updates the Data Browser if its contents have changed Options Opens the Query Options dialog box 3 Choose either Open or Open You can also choose File gt Open to load the selected file s product structure The STEP file s product structure is displayed as shown next Product Structure Active Qa eMiclPlels cod gt b ii EPD Connect User Guide 14 5 Using the EPD Interface for STEP AP203 Features Viewing a STEP File s Geometry From the 3D Viewer or EPD Visualizer you can display the three dimensional geometry of a STEP file With the file s product structure active 1 Launch the 3D Viewer by choosing Tools gt 3D Viewer or launch the EPD Visualizer by choosing Tools gt EPD Visualizer 2 Choose Display gt Load gt All Working with STEP Product Structu
336. y Status 2 36 Structure Overview 2 4 4 27 Structure Window 2 3 Transfer Requests 7 8 Windows Product structure 2 2 Working units 3D Viewer 5 15 Z Zones 6 7 Activating 6 7 Creating 6 7 Description 6 7 Storing 6 7 EPD Connect User Guide Index 9
337. y from EPD Connect because the 2D Drafting menu for MEDUSA can be used only for a SHEET You can execute the store replace update get and read commands on these objects You can run preprocessing and postprocessing shell scripts or other software routines before you invoke these commands See Features on page 12 3 File Naming Conventions The following file naming conventions govern MEDUSA objects The interface follows this convention while executing Vault commands on these objects Class of MEDUSA Object Object Type Convention and Meaning Sheet SHEET s XXX where XXX SHEET name Model MODEL m XXX where XXX MODEL name Symbol SYMBOL y XXX where XXX SYMBOL name EPD Connect User Guide Using the EPD Interface for MEDUSA Overview Features The EPD Interface for MEDUSA provides for the following e Interacting with Vault using EPD Connect e Using environment variables to add a software routine that runs immediately before a Vault command is executed e Supporting up to the latest MEDUSA release e Storing referenced SHEET when a SHEET is stored Limitations The limitations of the EPD Interface for MEDUSA are as follows e You cannot launch a MEDUSA application from the product structure To view a MEDUSA object start a MEDUSA session outside EPD Connect and open the MEDUSA object e You cannot open a MEDUSA application in the 3D Viewer The MEDUSA MODEL is an obj
338. ype Node System Type Part Number and GT code in the appropriate fields 9 In the Sys Code field select one of the system codes attached to the components 10 In the Review Msg field select one of the following e Yes Displays the comments of review requests and comments of the responses to those requests for Vault items that are in review e No Does not display review comments for items that are in review 7 44 EPD Connect User Guide Working with Vault Data Obtaining Information from the Vault 11 Click Advanced The Advanced Query Options dialog box opens r Advanced Query Options Updated by s Before s Since 7 On Stored by f s Before s Since On Action by f w Before y Since Sy On Attr Set eea d Attribute pesee fix Value eat Ite iri tite ats testis triies 1 Reset Gear All the settings in this dialog box are optional 12 In the Updated by field specify the user by whom the objects were Updated You can further limit this query by specifying a time range as well 13 In the Stored by field specify the user by whom the objects were Stored You can further limit this query by specifying a time range as well 14 In the Specify Action by field specify the user responsible for any current changes to components files or parts attributes history or projects 15 In the attributes sets Attr Set field select from the pull down list The list contains those user defined attribute
339. ys all components in the 3D Viewer regardless of their current state Selected Displays components currently selected in the product structure tree while retaining previously displayed components Highlighted Displays components currently highlighted in the product structure tree while retaining previously displayed components Only Selected Displays components currently selected in the product structure tree and removes previously displayed components Only Highlighted Displays components currently highlighted in the product structure tree and removes previously displayed components Hiding Components Hide Most of the options for hiding components displayed in the 3D Viewer operate on components that are selected or highlighted in the product structure tree The Hide options are Hide Menu Option Action All Hides all components displayed in the 3D Viewer This is used with other options as described in Using the Display Options Examples Selected Hides components currently selected in the product structure tree while previously hidden components remain hidden Highlighted Hides components currently highlighted in the product structure tree while previously hidden components remain hidden Only Selected Hides components currently selected in the product structure tree Only Highlighted Hides components currently highlighted in the product structure tree sele

EPD .Connect User Guide - John J. Jacobs

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents